bjcc premier parking lot p13 enhancements

Transcription

T•r•I
Architecture & Interior Design, LLC
Residential • Commercial • Interior Design • Planning • Historic Preservation
PROJECT MANUAL
BJCC PREMIER PARKING
LOT P13 ENHANCEMENTS
Birmingham, Alabama
Job No. 16-BJ01
June 16, 2016
OWNER:
BIRMINGHAM - JEFFERSON CONVENTION COMPLEX
P.O. Box 13347
2100 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd. North
Birmingham, AL 35203
Owner's Representative: Mr. Matt Wilson
P. 205.458.8491
[email protected].
DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY:
T.R.I Architecture & Interior Design, LLC
2617 Aberdeen Road
P. 205.290.2757
Teresa Rivadeneira, AIA
[email protected]
CIVIL ENGINEERING:
MBA Engineers, Inc.
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:
Nimrod Long And Associates.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING:
Consulting Construction Engineering, Inc.
2627 Aberdeen Road. • Birmingham, AL 35223 • Ph. 205.290.2757 • [email protected]
T.R.
©2016, T.R.I Architecture & Interior Design, LLC, All Rights Reserved
The Birmingham - Jefferson Convention Complex
BJCC Premier Parking Lot P13 Enhancements
Birmingham, Alabama
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
Index of drawings
00 1000
Advertisement for Bids
Invitation for Bid
Notification of Intent to Respond
Special Instructions on MBE/DBE Participation
00 2113
Instruction to Bidders
Bidders Information Form
Disclosure Statement of Relationship
00 4100
Bid Form
00 7200
00 7300
General Conditions
Supplementary Conditions
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000
01 2000
01 2200
01 2300
Summary of Work
Price and Payment Procedures
Unit prices
Alternates
01 3300
01 5000
01 6000
01 7000
Submittal Procedure
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Product Requirements
Closeout submittals
DIVISION 3 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000
Cast-In-place Concrete
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05 5000
05 5213
Metal Fabrications
Pipe and Tube Railings
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 1400
10 7500
Signage
Flagpoles
BJCC Premier Parking Lot P13
TRI Project # 16-BJ01
00000 - 1
June 16, 2016
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 0505
26 0519
26 0526
26 0534
26 0923
26 2416
26 5600
Electrical Systems
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Conduit
Lighting Control Devices
Panelboards
Exterior Lighting
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 1000
31 2000
Site Clearing
Earth Moving
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 840
32 930
Performance Irrigation
Landscape Work
32 1216
32 1313
Asphalt Paving
Concrete Paving
32 3119
32 3119.40
32 3913
Decorative Metal Fence
Ornamental Picket Cantilever Slide Gate
Bollards
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
33 1116
33 4100
Water Utility
Storm Utility Drainage Piping
APPENDIX
1 - Geotechnical Report
2 - BJCC Standards Signage
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
00000 - 2
June 16, 2016
Birmingham, Alabama
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
GENERAL
T−1
Title Sheet
CIVIL
C0.1
Site demolition Plan
C1.0
Site Plan
C2.0
Grading Plan
C3.0
Drainage Plan
C4.0
Erosion Control Plan
C5.0
Details
C5.1
Details
C5.2
Details
C5.3
Details
C5.4
Details
L−1
Planting Plan
L−2
Planting Details
I−1
Irrigation Plan
I−2
Irrigation Details
A−1
Architectural Site Plan
A−2
Fencing and Signage Details
A−3
Fence and Gates Details
E1.1
Electrical Legend, Riser Diagram and Details
E1.2
Electrical Details
E2.0
Electrical Demolition Plan
E2.1
Electrical Site Plan New Work
E2.2
Site Plan Photometrics
LANDSCAPE
ARCHITECTURAL
ELECTRICAL
END OF INDEX
00000 - 3
June 16, 2016
Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority
address 2100 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd North
website www.bjcc.org phone 205.458.8400
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID
The Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority will be accepting sealed bids for:
Bid information, requirements, plans and specifications may be downloaded at www.bjcc.org (click Vendor Information
– Open Bids section). There is no charge for downloading bid documents. They may also be examined and obtained at
the Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Purchasing Office, 2100 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd N, North Exhibition Hall, 3rd
Floor, Birmingham, AL 35203.
A Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held on Tuesday, June 28, 2016 at 2:00 p.m. in the Forum Building Meeting
Room M, located at 950 22nd Street North, Birmingham, AL 35203. Bids will not be accepted from vendors who do not
attend the Pre-Bid Conference.
Bids must be received for public opening on Monday, July 11, 2016 at 2:00 p.m. in the Forum Building Meeting Room
M, located at the above stated address. All bids received after 2:00 p.m. on the bid date will be retained in the file
unopened.
Questions should be emailed to [email protected]. Telephone inquiries are not accepted.
Sharon Proctor
Purchasing Coordinator
INVITATION FOR BID
SEALED BIDS WILL BE RECEIVED FOR:
PURCHASING COORDINATOR:
OBTAIN A COPY OF INVITATION FOR BID:
ISSUE DATE:
PRE-BID CONFERENCE:
BJCC
Forum Building Meeting Room M
950 22nd Street North
Tuesday, June 28, 2016 @ 2:00 p.m.
Sharon A. Proctor
A complete copy of the bid package is available at the above address or our
website: www.bjcc.org (Under Jobs & Vendor Opportunities- Open Bids)
June 16, 2016
SEND BID RESPONSE TO:
BJCC
Attn: Sharon A. Proctor, Purchasing Coordinator
2100 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd North, Dock #2
Bidders are encouraged to call the Purchasing
Coordinator at (205) 458-8432 prior to the bid
opening to ensure mailed bids have been
received. Bidders may hand deliver and present
bids at the bid opening. Bids received by the
Purchasing Coordinator after 2:00 p.m. on
bid date will be retained in the file, unopened.
BID OPENING:
BJCC
Forum Building Meeting Room M
950 22nd Street North
Monday, July 11, 2016 @ 2:00 p.m.
Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud.
Bids shall be in a sealed envelope with the name of
the project clearly marked on the outside of the
package. Bids must be submitted on forms furnished
by BJCC. Bids must be submitted in
duplicate. Bids may NOT be faxed or emailed.
NOTIFICATION OF INTENT:
Those vendors submitting the Notification of Intent, contained in the Invitation For Bid package, will be sent any related addendum, answers to inquiries,
etc. pertaining to this Invitation For Bid. The completed Notification of Intent must be faxed to (205) 458-8465, emailed to [email protected], or
mailed to: P.O. Box 13347 Birmingham, AL 35202, Attention: PURCHASING.
*** PLEASE RETURN THE NOTIFICATION OF INTENT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. ***
Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority is tax exempt.
BJCC reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, or any part of any bid, and to waive any informalities or irregularities in the bid.
All information asked for in this Invitation for Bid, including all documents, procedures, insurance certificates, and any other information asked for must
accompany the bid. Failure to include any asked for information may result in the bid being declared non-responsive.
General Contractors will be required to make a good faith effort to include MBE and DBE Companies in the execution of this project.
Construction contracts shall be awarded only to qualified Contractors, licensed by the State Licensing Board for General Contractors, as required by Title
34, Chapter 8, and Code of Alabama. Contracts in excess of $50,000 shall be awarded only to Contractors licensed as required by the 1978 Code of
Alabama, Title 34, and Chapter 8 as amended. Bidders must be “responsible” in accordance with criteria in the bid and as stipulated by Title 30-2-3-(e)
of the Code of Alabama.
In Accordance with Act 2013-205 – Certificate of Exception from Sales and Use Tax for Governmental Entities, contractors are to exclude sales
tax from their base bid, but must account for tax savings on the attached ABC Form C-3.
A Cashier’s Check drawn on an Alabama Bank, or a bid bond executed by a Surety company duly authorized and qualified to make such bonds
in Alabama, payable to the Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority in the amount of 5% of the amount of bids, but in no event more than
$10,000, must accompany the Bidder’s bid. Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds in the amount of 100% of the contract price
will be required when the Contract is presented by the Contractor to the Authority.
IMMIGRATION LAW COMPLIANCE - Bidders must provide proof of enrollment in E-Verify as a condition for the award of the contract.
All non-United States citizens who perform any work pursuant to this agreement shall have all necessary papers to verify their right to legally work in the
United States, and such paperwork shall be available for inspection during normal business hours by BJCC.
DISCLOSURE STATEMENT - If any owner, officer, partner, board or director member, employee, or holder of more than 5% of the fair market value
of the Bidder’s firm or any member of their households is an employee of BJCC, this information must be included in your solicitation response. By
accepting payments resulting from this bid, Bidder certifies that to its knowledge, no BJCC employee or official, and no family members of a BJCC
employee or official, will receive a benefit from these payments, except as has been previously disclosed, in writing to BJCC on the Disclosure
Statement, which is part of this Invitation for Bid. Failure to disclose this information in the response may result in the elimination of your bid
from consideration.
Questions concerning the specifications or scope of work should be emailed to Teresa Rivadeneira, AIA at [email protected].
Telephone inquiries are not accepted.
BJCC Premier Parking Lot P13 Enhancements 06/16/16
Page 1 of 23
NOTIFICATION OF INTENT TO RESPOND
Vendors submitting this “Notification of Intent to Respond,” will be sent any related addendum, answers to
inquiries, etc. pertaining to this Invitation for Bid. The contact information provided on this form will be used to
distribute the information.
(
) On behalf of myself/my firm/institution, I hereby certify that I/we intend to submit a response.
(
) On behalf of myself/my firm/institution, I hereby certify that I/we do not intend to submit a response.
Reason for not bidding:
Received bid package too late
Not enough time to develop bid
Not sufficient details
Job too large
Job too small
Not interested in this type of material/ service
Working at full capacity at this time
Cannot meet time schedule for completion of job
Specifications too restrictive
Other __________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
________________________________________
Contact Name
___________________________________________
Title
________________________________________
Email Address
___________________________________________
Phone Number
________________________________________
Authorized Signature
___________________________________________
Date
You may email your notification of intent to [email protected] or fax to 205-458-8465.
Page 2 of 23
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ON MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION
NOTE: ALL BIDDERS ON THIS PROJECT SHOULD READ CAREFULLY:
General Contractors bidding on this Project are asked to comply with the following guidelines:
1. The potential bidder(s) should acquire specifications and drawings to decide whether to submit a bid on
the project.
2. The potential bidder(s) are asked to contact the Birmingham Construction Industry Authority (BCIA)
MBE/DBE participation in the bid process and contract award. The BCIA has established a listing of
certified MBE/DBE, by trade categories, for assistance to General Contractors interested in bidding on
the projects.
3. The potential bidder(s) are asked to identify those trades and activities for which it will solicit and accept
bid for potential MBE/DBE Subcontractors. Then the potential bidder should notify the BCIA of those
trades and construction activities which were identified for possible MBE/DBE participation. This
notification will allow BCIA to apprise certified MBE/DBE’s of bid opportunity.
4. The BCIA will identify and notify certified MBE/DBE’s with respect to opportunities on each project.
5. The BCIA will assist interested MBE/DBE’s in bid preparation, and these MBE/DBE’s will submit bids to
General Contractors bidding on the project.
6. Within 45 days after receiving a Notice to Proceed, the General Contractor is asked to provide the BCIA
Executive Director with a list of MBE/DBE Subcontractors to whom it was awarded, or anticipate
awarding, subcontracts, along with a description of the scope of work to be performed by each such
MBE/DBE Subcontractor and the estimated dollar amount for each MBE/DBE contract awarded.
7. After the job closeout, the General Contractor will be asked to submit to the BCIA the name of the
MBE/DBE Subcontractors used on the job, along with the scope of the work and net dollar amount paid
to each such contractor.
Page 3 of 23
BIRMINGHAM CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY AUTHORITY
601 37TH STREET SOUTH
BIRMINGHAM, ALABAMA 35222
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
1
GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S NOTICE OF INTENT TO BID
MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION
BID DATA
1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR ________________________________________
ADDRESS: ________________________________________
________________________________________
CONTACT(S): ________________________________________
PHONE: ________________________________________
FAX: ________________________________________
EMAIL: ________________________________________
2. OWNER: ________________________________________
3. NAME OF PROJECT: ________________________________________
4. SCHEDULED PRE-BID MEETING
DATE/TIME: ________________________________________
LOCATION: ________________________________________
5. DATE/TIME FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS
TO CONTACT INDICATED ABOVE:________________________________________
6. SCHEDULED BID OPENING
DATE/TIME: ________________________________________
LOCATION: ________________________________________
7. ESTIMATED JOB START DATE: ________________________________________
8. ESTIMATED COMPLETION DATE: ________________________________________
Assistance is hereby requested in securing proposals for MBE/DBE Subcontractors/Suppliers per the
attached listing of construction specialties.
NOTICE TO BCIA - CERTIFIED CONTRACTORS:
IN ORDER TO BE CONSIDERED, PROPOSALS MUST BE RECEIVED IN THE OFFICE OF THE GENERAL
CONTRACTOR ON OR BEFORE THE DATE LISTED IN ITEM FIVE (5) ABOVE.
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
2
PROJECT: ______________________________
_________________________________________
LOCATION: _____________________________
BID DATE: ______________________________
GENERAL CONTRACTOR CONTACT:
NAME___________________________________
ADDRESS: ______________________________
__________________________________________
TELEPHONE: ( ) ____________________
FAX: ( ) _____________________________
EMAIL: ( ) ___________________________
__________________________________________
DEADLINE FOR PROPOSALS
_______________________________________
DATE/TIME
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS {1} {2} {3} {4} {5} *
[___] 02 21 SURVEYS
[___] 02 32 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
[___] 02 41 DEMOLITION
[___] 02 42 REMOVAL and SALVAGE of CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
[___] 02 43 STRUCTURE MOVING
Page 4 of 23
[___]02 56 SITE CONTAINMENT
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
3
[___] 02 65 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK REMOVAL
[___] 02 81 TRANSPORTATION and DISPOSAL of HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
[___] 02 82 ASBESTOS REMEDIATION
[___] 02 83 LEAD REMEDIATION
[___] 02 85 MOLD REMEDIATION
[___] 02 91 CHEMICAL SAMPLING, TESTING and ANALYSIS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE {1} {2} {3} {4} [5}
[___] 03 01 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
[___] 03 11 CONCRETE FORMING
[___] 03 15 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
[___] 03 21 REINFORCING STEEL
[___] 03 22 WELDED WIRE FABRIC REINFORCING
[___] 03 30 CAST–IN-PLACE CONCRETE
[___] 03 31 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE (continued) {1} {2} {3} {4} [5}
[___] 03 35 CONCRETE FINISHING
[___] 03 37 SPECIALTY PLACED CONCRETE
[___] 03 39 CONCRETE CURING
[___] 03 41 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
[___] 03 45 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
[___] 03 47 SITE-CAST CONCRETE
[___] 03 62 NON-SHRINK GROUTING
[___] 03 63 EPOXY GROUTING
[___] 03 81 CONCRETE CUTTING
[___] 03 82 CONCRETE BORING
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 04 21 CLAY UNIT MASONRY
[___] 04 22 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
[___] 04 25 UNIT MASONRY PANELS
[___] 04 27 MULTIPLE-WYTHE MASONRY
[___] 04 43 STONE MASONRY
[___] 04 57 MASONRY FIREPLACES
[___] 04 71 MANUFACTURED BRICK MASONRY
[___] 04 73 MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY
DIVISION 5 - METALS {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 05 12 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
[___] 05 14 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING
[___] 05 15 WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES
[___] 05 21 STEEL JOIST FRAMING
[___] 05 31 STEEL DECKING
[___] 05 35 RACEWAY DECKING ASSEMBLIES
[___] 05 41 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
[___] 05 42 COLD-FORMED METAL JOIST FRAMING
[___] 05 44 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES
[___] 05 51 METAL STAIRS
[___] 05 52 METAL RAILINGS
[___] 05 53 METAL GRATINGS
[___] 05 55 METAL STAIR TREADS & NOSING
[___] 05 56 METAL CASTINGS
[___] 05 58 FORMED METAL FABRICATIONS
[___] 05 71 DECORATIVE METAL STAIRS
[___] 05 73 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
[___] 05 75 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
DIVISION 6 – WOODS, PLASTICS & COMPOSITIES
{1} {2] {3} {4} {5}
Page 5 of 23
[___] 06 11 WOOD FRAMING
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
4
[___] 06 12 STRUCTURAL PANELS
[___] 06 15 WOOD DECKING
[___] 06 16 SHEATING
DIVISION 6 – WOODS, PLASTICS & COMPOSITIES (continued) {1} {2] {3} {4} {5}
[___] 06 17 SHOP FABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
[___] 06 22 MILLWORK
[___] 06 25 PREFINISHED PANEL
[___] 06 26 BOARD PANELING
[___] 06 43 WOOD STAIRS & RAILINGS
[___] 06 44 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK
[___] 06 48 WOOD FRAMES
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 07 11 DAMPPROOFING
[___] 07 12 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING
[___] 07 13 SHEET WATERPROOFING
[___] 07 16 CEMENTIOUS & REACTIVE WATERPROOFING
[___] 07 19 WATER REPELLANTS
[___] 07 21 THERMAL INSULATION
[___] 07 22 ROOF & DECK INSULATION
[___] 07 24 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS
[___] 07 25 WEATHER BARRIERS
[___] 07 26 VAPOR RETARDERS
[___] 07 31 SHINGLES & SHAKES
[___] 07 32 ROOF TILES
[___] 07 33 NATURAL ROOF COVERINGS
[___] 07 41 ROOF PANELS
[___] 07 42 WALL PANELS
[___] 07 46 SIDING
[___] 07 51 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
[___] 07 52 MODIFIED BIITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
[___] 07 53 ELASTOMETRIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
[___] 07 54 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
[___] 07 56 FLUID APPLIED ROOFING
[___] 07 58 ROLL ROOFING
[___] 07 61 SHEET METAL ROOFING
[___] 07 65 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
[___] 07 71 ROOF SPECIALTIES
[___] 07 72 ROOF ACCESSORIES
[___] 07 81 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
[___] 07 84 FIRESTOPPING
[___] 07 91 PREFORMED JOINT SEALS
[___] 07 92 JOINT SEALANTS
[___] 07 95 EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS {1} {2} {3} [4} {5}
[___] 08 11 METAL DOORS & FRAMES
[___] 08 12 METAL FRAMES
[___] 08 13 METAL DOORS
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS (continued) {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 08 14 WOOD DOORS
[___] 08 16 COMPOSITE DOORS
[___] 08 17 INTEGRATED DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIES
[___] 08 31 ACCESS DOORS & PANELS
[___] 08 32 SLIDING GLASS DOORS
[___] 08 33 COILING DOORS & GRILLES
[___] 08 34 SPECIAL FUNCTION DOORS
[___] 08 36 PANEL DOORS
Page 6 of 23
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
5
[___] 08 38 TRAFFIC DOORS
[___] 08 41 ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
[___] 08 42 ENTRANCES
[___] 08 43 STOREFRONTS
[___] 08 44 CURTAIN WALL & GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
[___] 08 51 METAL WINDOWS
[___] 08 52 WOOD WINDOWS
[___] 08 53 PLASTIC WINDOWS
[___] 08 54 COMPOSITE WINDOWS
[___] 08 56 SPECIAL FUNCTION WINDOWS
[___] 08 62 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
[___] 08 63 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
[___] 08 71 DOOR HARDWARE
[___] 08 74 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
[___] 08 75 WINDOW HARDWARE
[___] 08 79 HARDWARE ACCESSORIES
[___] 08 81 GLASS GLAZING
[___] 08 83 MIRRORS
[___] 08 84 PLASTIC GLAZING
[___] 08 88 SPECIAL FUNCTION GLAZING
[___] 08 91 LOUVERS
[___] 08 95 VENTS
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 09 21 PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
[___] 09 22 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD
[___] 09 23 GYPSUM PLASTERING
[___] 09 24 CEMENT PLASTERING
[___] 09 26 VENEER PLASTERING
[___] 09 28 BACKING BOARDS & UNDERLAYMENTS
[___] 09 29 GYPSUM BOARD
[___] 09 30 TILING
[___] 09 51 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
[___] 09 54 SPECIALTY CEILINGS
[___] 09 62 SPECIALTY FLOORING
[___] 09 63 MASONRY FLOORING
[___] 09 64 WOOD FLOORING
[___] 09 65 RESILIENT FLOORING
[___] 09 66 TERRAZZO FLOORING
[___] 09 68 CARPETING
[___] 09 72 WALL COVERINGS
[___] 09 77 SPECIAL WALL SURFACING
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES (continued) {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 09 91 PAINTING
[___] 09 93 STAINING & TRANSPARENT FINISHING
[___] 09 96 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
[___] 09 97 SPECIAL COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 10 11 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
[___] 10 14 SIGNAGE
[___] 10 22 PARTITIONS
[___] 10 26 WALL & DOOR PROTECTION
[___] 10 28 TOILET, BATH & LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
[___] 10 44 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
[___] 10 51 LOCKERS
[___] 10 71 EXTERIOR PROTECTION
[___] 10 74 MANUFACTURED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES
[___] 10 75 FLAGPOLES
Page 7 of 23
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
6
[___] 10 81 PEST CONTROL DEVICES
[___] 10 88 SCALES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 11 11 VEHICLE SERVICE EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 12 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 13 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 14 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 24 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 31 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
[___] 11 33 RETRACTABLE STAIRS
[___] 11 41 FOODSERVICE STORAGE EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 42 FOOD PREPARATION EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 43 FOOD DELIVERY CARTS AND CONVEYORS
[___] 11 44 FOOD COOKING EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 46 FOOD DISPENSING EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 47 ICE MACHINES
[___] 11 48 CLEANING & DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 52 AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 53 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 66 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 67 RECREATIONAL EQUIPMENT
[___] 11 82 SOLID WASTE HANDLING
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 12 21 WINDOW BLINDS
[___] 12 22 CURTAINS & DRAPES
[___] 12 23 INTERIOR SHUTTERS
[___] 12 24 WINDOW SHADES
[___] 12 32 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
[___] 12 35 SPECIALTY CASEWORK
[___] 12 36 COUNTERTOPS
[___] 12 46 FURNISHING ACCESSORIES
[___] 12 48 RUGS & MATS
[___] 12 51 OFFICE FURNITURE
[___] 12 52 SEATING
[___] 12 54 HOSPITALITY FURNITURE
[___] 12 56 INSTITUTIONAL FURNITURE
[___] 12 61 FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
[___] 12 63 STADIUM & ARENA SEATING
[___] 12 67 PEWS & BENCHES
[___] 12 92 INTERIOR PLANTERS & ARTIFICAL PLANTS
[___] 12 93 SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 13 11 SWIMMING POOLS
[___] 13 17 TUBS & POOLS
[___] 13 18 ICE RINKS
[___] 13 21 CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT ROOMS
[___] 13 24 SPECIAL ACTIVITY ROOMS
[___] 13 28 ATHLETIC & RECREATIONAL SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
[___] 13 31 FABRIC STRUCTURES
[___] 13 34 FABRICATED ENGINEERED STRUCTURES
[___] 13 36 TOWERS
[___] 13 42 BUILDING MODULES
[___] 13 48 SOUND, VIBRATION, & SEISMIC CONTROL
[___] 13 49 RADIATION PROTECTION
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 14 11 MANUAL DUMBWAITERS
Page 8 of 23
[___] 14 12 ELECTRIC DUMBWAITERS
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
7
[___] 14 21 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
[___] 14 24 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
[___] 14 27 CUSTOM ELEVATOR CABS & DOORS
[___] 14 28 ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT & CONTROLS
[___] 14 31 ESCALATORS
[___] 14 32 MOVING WALKS
[___] 14 42 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
[___] 14 51 CORRESPNDENCE & PARCEL LIFTS
[_ _] 14 91 FACILITY CHUTES
[___] 14 92 PNEUMATIC TUBE SYSYTEMS
DIVISION 21 –FIRE SUPPRESSION {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 21 11 FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING &METHODS
[___] 21 12 FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
[___] 21 13 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
[___] 21 21 CARBON-DIOXIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
[___] 21 22 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
[___] 21 31 CENTIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
DIVISON 22-PLUMBING {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 22 07 PLUMBING INSULATION
[___] 22 11 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
[___] 22 13 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
[___] 22 14 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
[___] 22 41 COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURE
[___] 22 42 COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
[___] 22 45 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
[___] 22 47 DRINKING FOUNTAINS & WATER COOLERS
[___] 22 51 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING SYSTEMS
[___] 22 66 CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LAB & HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
DIVISON 23-HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 23 07 HVAC INSULATION
[___] 23 09 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL FOR HVAC
[___] 23 13 FACILITY FUEL-STORAGE TANKS
[___] 23 21 HYDRONIC PIPING & PUMPS
[___] 23 22 STEAM & CONDENSATE PIPING & PUMPS
[___] 23 31 HVAC DUCTS & CASINGS
[___] 23 33 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
[___] 23 34 HVAC FANS
[___] 23 37 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS
[___] 23 38 VENTILATION HOODS
[___] 23 41 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
[___] 23 52 HEATING BOILERS
[___] 23 54 FURNACES
[___] 23 56 SOLAR ENERGY HEATING EQUIPMENT
[___] 23 57 HEAT EXCHANGES FOR HVAC
[___] 23 62 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR & CONDENSOR UNITS
[___] 23 63 REFRIGERANT CONDENSORS
[___] 23 64 PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS
[___] 23 65 COOLING TOWERS
[___] 23 73 INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIRHANDLING UNITS
[___] 23 74 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIP
DIVISON 23-HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING (continued) {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 23 82 CONVECTION HEATING & COOLING UNITS
[___] 23 84 HUMIDITY CONTROL EQUIPMENT
DIVISON 26-ELECTRICAL {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 26 05 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Page 9 of 23
[___] 26 09 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
8
[___] 26 12 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
[___] 26 22 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
[___] 26 24 SWITCHBOARDS & PANELBOARDS
[___] 26 25 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
[___] 26 27 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
[___] 26 28 LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
[___] 26 29 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
[___] 26 32 PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES
[___] 26 35 POWER FILTERS & CONDITIONERS
[___] 26 42 CATHODIC PROTECTION
[___] 26 51 INTERIOR LIGHTING
[___] 26 52 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
[___] 26 53 EXIT SIGNS
[___] 26 54 CLASSIFIED LOCATION LIGHTING
[___] 26 55 SPECIAL PURPOSE LIGHTING
[___] 26 56 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
[___] 26 61 LIGHTING SYSTEMS & ACCESSORIES
[___] 26 71 ELECTRICAL MACHINES
DIVISON 27-COMMUNICATIONS {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 27 13 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
[___] 27 41 AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS
[___] 27 51 DISTRIBUTED AUDIO VIDEO
[___] 27 52 HEALTHCARE COMMUNICATIONS & MONITORING SYSTEMS
[___] 27 53 DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS
DIVISON 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 28 13 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
[___] 28 16 INTRUSION DETECTION
[___] 28 23 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
[___] 28 31 FIRE DETECTION
[___] 28 33 FUEL-GAS DETECTION
[___] 28 39 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS
DIVISON 31-EARTHWORK {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 31 05 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EARTHWORK
[___] 31 06 SCHEDULES FOR EARTHWORK
[___] 31 11 CLEARING & GRUBBING
[___] 31 13 SELECTIVE TREE & SHRUB REMOVAL & TRIMMING
[___] 31 14 EARTH STRIPPING & STOCKPILING
[___] 31 22 GRADING
[___] 31 23 EXCAVATION & FILL
[___] 31 25 ERSION & SEDIMENTATION
[___] 31 31 SOIL TREATMENT
[___] 31 32 SOIL STABILIZATION
[___] 31 33 ROCK STABILIZATION
[___] 31 36 GABIONS
[___] 31 37 RIPRAP
[___] 31 41 SHORING
[___] 31 43 CONCRETE RAISING
[___] 31 45 VIBROFLORATION & DENSIFICATION
[___] 31 46 NEEDLE BEAMS
[___] 31 48 UNDERPINNING
[___] 31 52 COFFERDAMS
[___] 31 56 SHURRY WALLS
[___] 31 62 DRIVEN PILES
[___] 31 63 BORED PILES
DIVISON 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 32 01 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR IMPROVEMEMTS
Page 10 of 23
[___] 32 06 SCHEDULES FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
[___] 32 11 BASE COURSES
Telephone: (205) 324-6202 Fax: (205) 324-6210
9
[___] 32 12 FLEXIBLE PAVING
[___] 32 13 RIGID PAVING
[___] 32 16 CURBS, GUTTERS SIDEWALKS & DRIVEWAYS
[___] 32 17 PAVING SPECIALTIES
[___] 32 18 ATHLETIC & RECREATIONAL SURFACING
[___] 32 31 FENCES & GATES
[___] 32 32 RETAINING WALLS
[___] 32 34 FABRICATED BRIDGES
[___] 32 35 SCREENING DEVICES
[___] 32 84 PLANTING IRRIGATION
[___] 32 91 PLANTING PREPARATION
[___] 32 92 TURF & GRASSES
[___] 32 93 PLANTS
[___] 32 94 PLANTING ACCESSORIES
[___] 32 96 TRANSPLANTING
DIVISON 33-UTILITIES {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 33 01 OPERATIION & MAINTENANCE OF UTILITIES
[___] 33 05 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
DIVISON 33-UTILITIES {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 33 11 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
[___] 33 12 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
[___] 33 16 WATER UTILITY STORAGE TANKS
[___] 33 21 WATER SUPPLY WELLS
[___] 33 31 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
[___] 33 36 UTILITY SEPTIC TANKS
[___] 33 41 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
[___] 33 42 CULVERTS
[___] 33 44 STORM UTILITY WATER DRAINS
[___] 33 46 SUBDRAINAGE
[___] 33 49 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
[___] 33 51 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
[___] 33 52 LIQUID FUEL DISTRIBUTION
[___] 33 71 ELECTRICAL UTILITY TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
[___] 33 81 COMMUNICATIONS & STRUCTURES
DIVISON 34-TRANSPORATION{1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 34 01 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF TRANSPORTATION
[___] 34 11 RAIL TRACKS
[___] 34 41 ROADWAY SIGNALING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
[___] 34 71 ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
[___] 34 72 RAILWAY CONSTRUCTION
DIVISON 41-MATERIAL PROCESSING & HANDLING EQUIPMENT{1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 41 21 CONVEYORS
[___] 41 22 CRANES & HOISTS
DIVISON 44-POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 44 11 PARTICULATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
DIVISON 46-WATER & WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT {1} {2} {3} {4} {5}
[___] 46 07 PACKAGED WATER & WASTEWATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
* Estimated Contract Opportunity Value:
{1} 0-25,000 {2) 25,000-50,000 {3} 50,000-100,000
{4} 100,000 - 500,000 {5} over 500,000
Page 11 of 23
1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 This will be for the use of the Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority, Birmingham, Alabama
(hereinafter called “BJCC”).
1.2 BJCC is Tax Exempt.
1.3 Payment terms are net 30. Other payment terms can be negotiated.
1.4 No interpretation or modification made to any respondent as to the meaning of the Invitation for Bid
shall be binding on BJCC unless submitted in writing and distributed as an addendum by BJCC Purchasing
Department. Verbal information obtained otherwise will not be considered in awarding of contract. All
addenda shall become part of the Invitation for Bid.
1.5 IMPORTANT: It is required that the Bidder Information Form, Exhibit #1, furnished with this Invitation
for Bid, be completed and submitted with your bid. Failure to comply with this request may eliminate
your bid from consideration.
1.6 All bid responses, technical information and any other attachments in response to this Invitation for
Bid must be submitted in triplicate on the form provided. (THE ORIGINAL BID AND ATTACHMENTS
WITH ORIGINAL SIGNATURE AND TWO EXACT COPIES OF THE ENTIRE BID RESPONSE). They shall be
submitted in a sealed opaque envelope clearly marked with bidder’s name, address, and STATE
CONTRACTOR LICENSE NUMBER, the name of the project being bid, and time and place of bid opening.
Bidders who fail to follow this format may be disqualified from the evaluation and award phase of the
bid.
1.7 Bids having any erasures or corrections must be initialed in ink. Bids must be signed in ink by an official
authorized representative.
1.8 All information asked for in this Invitation for Bid, including all documents, procedures, insurance
certificates, and any other information asked for, must accompany the bid. Failure to include any
asked for information may result in the bid being declared non-responsive.
1.9 BJCC reserves the right to waive any informality in any offer; to reject any or all offers, in whole or in part;
and to accept the offer most advantageous to BJCC should it be deemed in its best interest to do so.
1.10 The attached specifications cover minimum standards; any alternate services or equipment bid offered
should meet or exceed BJCC’s needs. BJCC, acting in its best interest, will award this contract to one
vendor or no vendors. BJCC shall be the sole judge of the quality or inequality of the items proposed in
this bid. BJCC’s decision shall be final.
1.11 The use of specific names and numbers are not intended to restrict the bidding of any seller and/or
manufacturer, but is solely for the purpose of indicating the type, size and quality of materials, products,
service, or equipment considered best adapted to BJCC’s intended use.
1.12 Products submitted on this bid should meet or exceed the stated specifications, which are intended to
set a standard of quality and are not intended to limit competition.
1.13 Proprietary specifications may be waived for functional equivalents offered, if authorized by requesting
department.
Page 12 of 23
1.14 Bidder further agrees to demonstrate, in Jefferson County, Alabama, and materials and/or equipment
within five (5) days of request from BJCC and at Bidder’s expense that is offered as equivalent to but not
matching BJCC’s specification.
1.15 All costs incurred by the company to respond to this solicitation will be wholly the responsibility of the
Bidder. All copies and contents of the bid, attachments, and explanations thereto submitted in response
to this Invitation for Bid, except copyrighted material, shall become the property of BJCC, regardless if a
Consultant is selected.
1.16 BJCC’s Architect will issue written addenda to the document changes required in the work during the
proposal period, or to clarify discrepancies or obscurities in the Contract Documents if such are found.
No oral instructions or interpretations will be considered binding on BJCC unless confirmed in an
addenda.
1.17 Bidder agrees to furnish all equipment, accessories, material, services and/or delivery, as specified per
Bid Documents and Technical Specifications. It is the responsibility of the Bidder under the terms of this
contract to comply with all applicable codes of authority such as safety, licensing, EPA Regulations, etc.
1.18 Submissions may be withdrawn, modified, and resubmitted prior to the formal bid opening due date.
Any submission modification(s) submitted after the bid opening due date will not be considered.
1.19 BJCC is not responsible for delays by the Air Courier, Delivery or Messenger Service, US Postal Service, the
internal mail delivery system of BJCC, or any other means of delivery employed by the Bidder. Similarly,
BJCC is not responsible for, and will not open, any bid responses which are received later than the date
and time indicated above. Late bids will be retained in the file, unopened.
1.20 Shipping will be F.O.B. Destination, BJCC, Birmingham, Alabama. Unit prices quoted must include any and
all shipping and handling charges. Any freight claims will be the responsibility of the Bidder.
1.21 BJCC is strongly committed to equal opportunity in solicitation of Invitation for Bids. BJCC encourages
Bidders to share this commitment. Each Bidder submitting a bid agrees not to refuse to hire, discharge,
promote, demote, or to otherwise discriminate against any person otherwise qualified solely because of
race, creed, sex, national origin or disability.
1.22 The Bidder must have necessary business licenses as required by the State, County, and City.
1.23 The undersigned certifies that this bid is genuine and not collusive.
1.24 BJCC is a drug free workplace. The bidder shall, upon awarding the contract, supply certification to BJCC
that a drug free workplace will be maintained in accordance to all BJCC policies.
1.25 No firearms or alcoholic beverages are allowed on BJCC property at any time.
1.26 BJCC is a smoke-free workplace and smoking is allowed only in designated areas.
1.27 All Bidder employees are expected to conduct themselves in a professional manner at all times. BJCC is a
professional workplace and all communications must be conducted in a professional business manner.
Foul language, obscene jesters, clothing or caps found to be offensive to anyone will not be tolerated. If
an employee is found to be guilty of any of these conducts, he may be required to leave the premises
immediately and not allowed back on the property to perform any work as the Bidder’s representative.
1.28 All Bidder employees working at BJCC are required to wear either a uniform or company ID properly
identifying your employee. The uniform should be clean and include the company logo and the
employee’s name. Clothing other than uniform should be appropriate for the professional work place. Tshirts without sleeves and with inappropriate language, flip-flops, and caps with inappropriate messages
are prohibited. The decision of whether a garment is appropriate belongs to BJCC and is final.
1.29 Subject to applicable law or regulations, the content of each Bidder’s Proposal shall become public
Page 13 of 23
information upon the effective date of any resulting contract.
1.30 In accordance with section 39-2-6, if no bids or only one bid is received at the time stated in the
advertisement for bids, BJCC may advertise for and seek other competitive bids, or BJCC may negotiate
for the work through the receipt of informal bids.
2
TAX EXEMPTION
2.1 BJCC is tax exempt.
2.2 In accordance with Legislative Act 2013-205, Code of Alabama (1975) Section 40-9-14.1, at the time of
Bid, provide an accounting of sales tax on the Accounting of Sales Tax form, Exhibit 4. Failure to
provide an accounting of sales tax shall render the bid non-responsive. Other than determining
responsiveness, sales tax accounting shall not affect the bid pricing nor be considered in the
determination of the lowest responsible and responsive bidder.
2.3 Each contractor and subcontractor must make application for qualification of the Sales and Use Tax
exemption using Alabama Department of Revenue Form ST: EXC-01 for each tax exempt project. The
application is available on the Alabama Department of Revenue’s website at:
http://revenue.alabama.gov/salestax/ST-EXC-O1.pdf.
2.4 Contractors and subcontractors for qualifying projects will be required to file monthly consumers use
tax returns and report all exempt purchases for ongoing projects, as well as all taxable purchases on
one return. These returns are required to be filed through the Alabama Department of Revenue’s
online tax return filing and payment portal, My Alabama Taxes (http://myalabamataxes.alabama.gov).
3
DISPUTES
3.1 Any contract agreement that is issued based on this Invitation for Bid, the parties shall agree that the
contract agreement is made and entered into in Jefferson County, Alabama, and that all services,
materials, and equipment to be rendered pursuant to said contract agreement are to be delivered in
Jefferson County, Alabama. The interpretation and enforcement of this contract agreement will be
governed by laws of the State of Alabama. The parties agree that jurisdiction and venue over all disputes
arising under this contract agreement shall be the Circuit Court of Jefferson County Alabama, Birmingham
Division.
4
PERFORMANCE
4.1 In the event the Bidder defaults in performing this contract, it agrees to pay BJCC its reasonable costs
incurred in remedying such default, including reasonable attorney’s fees.
4.2 The Bidder will be held responsible for any damage to BJCC’s property caused by his work or workmen
and for any project delays due to lack of response to BJCC’s needs. The property shall be restored to its
original condition as required by BJCC.
4.3 BJCC reserves the right to enter into contract negotiations with the selected bidder. If BJCC and the
selected Bidder cannot negotiate a successful contract, BJCC may terminate negotiations and begin
negotiations with the next selected Bidder. This process will continue until a contract has been executed
or all proposals have been rejected. No Bidder shall have any rights against the county arising from such
negotiations.
4.4 Under certain conditions, the Purchasing Department may apply a local preference option in determining
the low bid for purchases of personal property.
5
PRICE QUOTATION
5.1 IMPORTANT: It is required that the BID FORM, Exhibit #3, furnished with this Invitation for Bid be
completed and submitted with your bid. DO NOT send generated price lists as your bid. Failure to
comply with this request may eliminate your bid from consideration.
Page 14 of 23
5.2 BJCC’s payment terms are net 30. Other payment terms can be negotiated.
5.3 It is the Bidder’s responsibility to verify all information and measurements, and to obtain any clarification
necessary prior to submitting the bid response. BJCC is not liable for any errors or misinterpretations
made by the Bidder in response to this Invitation for Bid.
5.4 The successful Bidder under the specifications required in this Invitation for Bid shall furnish at its
expense, all equipment, labor, tools, supplies, transportation (including fuel surcharge, if applicable),
insurance, and other expenses necessary to fully perform any phase of the requirements of this
Invitation for Bid. Prices shall remain firm for the term of the contract.
5.5 Discounts for payments made twenty (20) days or more from receipt of invoice will be considered in
award of bid. Payment discounts must be clearly shown on the Bid Form.
5.6 The Bidder agrees to maintain pricing for a minimum period of six (6) months following receipt of the
“Notice to Proceed.”
6
QUANTITIES
6.1 Quantities shown are estimates, and are not a guarantee to buy in the amount shown.
6.2 Bidder agrees that BJCC will be charged no more for item(s) bid than the State of Alabama, and that in
the event of a price reduction; BJCC will receive the benefit of such reduction on any undelivered portion
of the contract.
7
REFERENCES
7.1
8
Bidder must submit with the bid, three (3) current business references for contact, which the
Bidder has successfully provided products, services or installation of equipment similar to those
required in this Invitation for Bid in terms of manufacturer, size, features, service or type of
installation. The references must include company name, address, contact name, phone number, and
email address. Failure to comply with this request may eliminate your bid from consideration.
IMMIGRATION LAW COMPLIANCE
8.1 Bidders must provide proof of enrollment in E-Verify as a condition for the award of the contract.
Failure to submit a Memorandum of Understanding with the bid may eliminate your bid from
consideration.
8.2 By signing this contract, the contracting parties affirm, for the duration of the agreement, that they will
not violate federal immigration law or knowingly employ, hire for employment, or continue to employ an
unauthorized alien within the state of Alabama. Furthermore, a contracting party found to be in violation
of this provision shall be deemed in breach of the agreement and shall be responsible for all damages
resulting therefrom.
8
DISCLOSURE STATEMENT
9.1 If any owner, officer, partner, board or director member, employee, or holder of more than 5% of the fair
market value of the Bidder’s firm or any member of their households is an employee of BJCC, this
information must be included in the solicitation response. Failure to disclose this information in the
response may result in the elimination of your bid from consideration.
9.2 IMPORTANT: It is required that the Disclosure Statement of Relationship Between Bidder and
Employees/Officials of BJCC, Exhibit #2, furnished with this Invitation for Bid, be completed and
submitted with your bid. Failure to comply with this request may eliminate your bid from
consideration.
9.3 If any owner, officer, partner, board or director member, employee, or holder of more than 5% of the fair
market value of the Bidder’s firm or any member of their households is an employee of BJCC; and the
Bidder’s firm is awarded a contract as a result of this Invitation for Bid, then within ten (10) days after the
contract is entered into, the Bidder agrees to file a copy of that contract with the State of Alabama Ethics
Commission in accordance with Code of Alabama, Section 36-25-11 and upon request by BJCC furnish
Page 15 of 23
evidence of such filing.
9.4 By accepting payments resulting from this bid, Bidder certifies that to its knowledge no BJCC employee or
official, and no family members of a BJCC employee or official, will receive a benefit from these
payments, except as has been previously disclosed, in writing, to BJCC on the Disclosure Statement of
Relationship Between Bidder and Employees/Officials of BJCC, which is part of this Invitation for Bid.
10
DETAILED CONDITIONS
10.1 The bids will be submitted to BJCC Executive Board at the August 2016 Board Meeting. Following Board
approval, the successful bidder will be notified immediately in order to facilitate moving forward with all
contract, construction documents, and submittals.
10.2 Successful Bidder hereby agrees to begin this project as specified in the contract documents on or before
a date to be specified in the “Notice to Proceed” by BJCC and all work will be completed no later than
November 15, 2016. Liquidated Damages -$1,500 per calendar day for completion dates as specified in
the contract for construction.
10.3 All equipment, construction, and installation will comply with City, County, State, and Federal codes and
regulations. The Bidder will obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, etc., as required by the City of
Birmingham and Jefferson County, Alabama, where the work is to be performed, and shall give all legal
notices and pay all fees required for the work. Bidder will also notify proper authorities for inspections
and furnish any certificates required for the work.
10.4
Bidder should make every effort to include all costs in the bid. Any change order must be submitted in
writing with justification and cost. This document will be reviewed by BJCC Facility Engineer. If approved,
a signed coy will be returned to the Bidder.
10.5
The Successful Bidder shall complete A1A 101 2007 contract documents for execution by BJCC. Three (3)
signed original copies of this contract, three (3) original copies of performance bond, and three (3)
original certificates of insurance shall be submitted for execution by BJCC. The copies will be signed and
distributed one (1) copy to the Successful Bidder, and two (2) copies to BJCC.
10.6
The Successful Bidder at all times shall be and act solely as an independent entity, not as an employee.
Nothing in this Agreement or relationship between Bidder and BJCC shall operate or be construed as
creating a relationship of employer/employee, agent, partner, joint venture or any other relationship
whatsoever between BJCC and the Successful Bidder.
10.7
The Successful Bidder shall have no authority to, and shall not (i) act as an agent of BJCC; (ii) contractually
bind or obligate the Owner in any way; (iii) hold himself/herself/itself out as an agent of BJCC or as having
the authority to contractually bind or obligate BJCC; (iv) provide any services to or on behalf of BJCC
other than pursuant to this agreement with the properly executed “Letter of Agency” from BJCC.
10.8
The Bidder assumes all risks of loss in regard to all of its property or inventory and the property or
inventory of any sub-contractors located on the premises of BJCC.
10.9
No modifications or alterations to this Agreement will be valid or effective unless made in writing and
signed by both parties creating an amendment to the contract.
10.10 INSURANCE
10.10.1 Hold Harmless and Indemnification: Contracting party agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and
defend BJCC, its elected officers, employees, past and present, Starwood Hotels and Resorts
Page 16 of 23
Worldwide, Inc., employees, and its agents, past and present, (hereinafter referred to in this
paragraph collectively as “BJCC”), from and against any and all claims, damages, losses,
judgments, liens, penalties, interest, and expenses, including but not limited to court costs and
attorneys’ fees, for liability claimed against or imposed upon BJCC because of bodily injury,
death or property damages, real or personal, including loss of use thereof arising out of or as a
consequence of the breach of any duty or obligations of the contracting party included in this
agreement, Bidder’s performance or failure to perform any obligations contained in this
document, the inaccuracy of any representations or warranties of the Bidder contained herein;
negligent acts, errors or omissions, including engineering and/or professional error, fault,
mistake or negligence of Integrator, its employees, agents, representatives, or subcontractors,
their employees, agents or representatives in connections with or incident to the performance
of this agreement, or arising out of Worker’s Compensation claims, Unemployment
Compensation claims, or Unemployment Disability claims of employees of company and/or its
subcontractors or claims under similar such law or obligations, the payment or non-payment of
any taxes relating to any monies paid to the Bidder pursuant to this Agreement, the foregoing
provisions, and all liabilities of the Bidder hereunder, shall survive the termination of this
Agreement. Company obligation under this Section shall not extend to any liability caused by
the sole negligence of BJCC, or its employees. The certificate must include the added
additional Insured by Endorsement:
10.10.1.1
The Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority, and employees must be
listed as additional insured.
10.10.1.2
30 day(s) written cancellation notice.
10.10.2 The certificate must be received by BJCC Purchasing Department within three (3) days of
request. Failure to comply with this request may eliminate the bid from consideration.
10.10.3 BJCC reserves the right to terminate any resulting contract, if the Bidder fails to keep the
insurance policies in force for the below amounts or for the duration of the contract period.
10.10.4 The umbrella policy must be listed on the insurance certificate.
10.10.5 Before beginning work, Bidder shall provide a current certificate of insurance with the following
coverage:
10.10.5.1 Worker’s Compensation Insurance per Alabama State Law.
10.10.5.1.1 Worker’s Compensation Coverage shall be provided in accordance with the
statutory coverage required in Alabama. A group insurer must submit a
certificate of authority from the Alabama Department of Industrial Relations
approving the group insurance plan. A self-insurer must submit a certificate
from the Alabama Department of Industrial Relations stating the Contractor
qualifies to pay its own worker’s compensation claims.
10.10.5.1.2 Employer’s Liability Insurance limits shall be at least:
10.10.5.1.3 Bodily Injury by Accident - $1,000,000 per accident.
10.10.5.1.4 Bodily Injury by Disease - $1,000,000 per employee.
10.10.5.2 Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance
10.10.5.2.1
Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance which shall
include coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from the
operation of any owned, non-owned or hired automobile. The Commercial
Business Automobile Liability Insurance Policy shall provide not less than
$1,000,000 Combined Single Limits for each occurrence.
Page 17 of 23
10.10.5.3 Commercial General Liability Insurance
10.10.5.3.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance written on an ISO Occurrence Form
(current edition) or equivalent, shall include, but need not be limited to,
coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from premises and
operations liability, products and completed operations liability, blasting
and explosion, collapse of structures, and underground damage, personal
injury liability and contractual liability. The Commercial General Liability
Insurance shall provide at minimum the following limits:
i.
General Aggregate
$2,000,000/Project
ii.
Products, Completed Operations Aggregate
$2,000,000/Project
iii.
iv.
10.10.5.4
Personal and Advertising Injury
$2,000,000/Occurrence
Each Occurrence
$2,000,000
Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance
10.10.5.4.1 Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance to provide excess coverage above
the Commercial General Liability, Commercial Business Automobile Liability
and the Worker’s Compensation and Employee’s Liability to satisfy the
minimum limits set forth herein.
10.10.5.4.2 Minimum Combined Primary Commercial General Liability and
Commercial/Excess Umbrella Limits of:
i. $5,000,000 per Occurrence
ii. $5,000,000 Aggregate
10.10.5.4.3 Additional Requirements for Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance
i.
The policy shall name BJCC, Starwood Hotels and Resorts Worldwide,
Inc., and their agents, consultants, and employees as additional insured.
ii. The policy must be on an “occurrence” basis.
10.10.5.5 Builder’s Risk Insurance
10.10.5.5.1 The Builder’s Risk Policy shall be made payable to the Owner and
Contractor, as their interests may appear. The policy amount shall be equal
to 100% of the Contract Sum, written on a Causes of Loss – Special Form
(current edition), or its equivalent. All deductibles shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor.
10.10.5.5.2 The policy shall be endorsed as follows, “The following may occur without
diminishing, changing, altering or otherwise affecting the coverage and
protection afforded the insured under the policy:
10.10.5.5.3 Furniture and equipment may be delivered to the insured premises and
installed in place ready for use; or
10.10.5.5.4 Partial or complete occupancy by Owner; or
10.10.5.5.5 Performance of work in connection with construction operations insured by
the Owner, by agents or lessees or other contractors of the Owner, or by
contractor of the lessee of the Owner.”
10.11 BONDS
10.11.1 Bid Bond - A Cashier’s Check drawn on an Alabama Bank or bid bond, executed by a Surety
company duly authorized and qualified to make such bonds in Alabama, payable to
Birmingham-Jefferson Civic Center Authority in the amount of 5% of the amount of bid, but
shall not exceed $10,000.00 and must accompany the Bidder’s bid.
10.11.2 Performance Bond – The Successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance and
Page 18 of 23
Labor and Material Payment Bond to guarantee that the payment and performance of the
contract will be properly secured. The bond will extend three (3) months past the contract
period. Bidder will be required to correct any problems found resulting from material and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year following the contract completion. The penal sum of
the bond shall be equal to 100% of the contract value. The Bidder shall pay the premium of
the bond.
10.12 TERMINATION
10.12.1
11
This contract may be terminated by BJCC with a thirty (30) day written notice to the Bidder
regardless of reason. Any violation of this agreement shall constitute a breach and default
of this agreement. Upon such breach, BJCC shall have the right to immediately terminate
the contract; Bidder shall be paid for services rendered to the date of termination; and BJCC
shall have no further financial obligation to the Bidder. Such termination shall not relieve
the Bidder of any liability to BJCC for damages sustained by virtue of a breach by the Bidder.
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS
Refer to Divisions of Project Manual for detailed project specifications.
Page 19 of 23
Exhibit 1
BIDDER INFORMATION FORM
Company Name: ____________________________________________ Federal Tax ID #:___________________________
d/b/a: _______________________________________________________________________________________________
Address:____________________________________________________County:___________________________________
City: __________________________________________________________State: ___________ Zip: _________________
Phone: (_____)_________________________________
Fax Number:_______________________________________
Contact Person: ___________________________________
Email Address: _____________________________________
Web Site: ____________________________________________________________________________________________
INDICATE THE FOLLOWING ADDRESSES IF DIFFERENT FROM ABOVE:
1. BID AWARD NOTICE ADDRESS:
2. PURCHASE ORDER ADDRESS:
3. REMITTANCE ADDRESS:
REFERENCE INFORMATION:
Name of Account
Contact Name
Phone Number
1
2
3
4
____________________________________________________
____________________________________
Page 20 of 23
Name of person completing this form
Date
Exhibit 2
Disclosure Statement of Relationship Between Bidder and Employees/Officials of BJCC
Name of Bid:
____________________________________________________________
Bidder’s Name:
____________________________________________________________
Bidder’s Address:
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Telephone: __________________________________________________
Fax: ________________________________________________________
Does the Bidder have any relationship with any employee or official of BJCC, or a family
member of such employee or official, that will enable such employee or official, or his/her
family member, to benefit from this contract? If so, please state the names, relationships, and
nature of the benefit.
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
(For employees of BJCC, family members include spouse and dependents. For members of the
Board of Directors (officials), family members include spouse, dependents, adult children and
their spouses, parents, in-laws, siblings and their spouses.)
This Disclosure Form will be available for public inspection upon request.
The above information is true and accurate, to the best of my knowledge.
__________________________________________
Signature of Authorized Agent of Bidder
Date: _____________________________________
RETURN FORM TO:
BJCC
Attn: Purchasing Department
2100 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd. North
PHONE: (205) 458-8432 / FAX: (205) 458-8465
Page 21 of 23
Exhibit 3
Bid Form
(Bidder must use this form; Fill in all spaces.)
The Bidder, in compliance with the Invitation for Bid for BJCC Premier parking Lot P13 Enhancements, as
specified, for BJCC, Birmingham, Alabama, having examined the specifications and related documents, hereby
proposes to furnish all equipment, materials, accessories and/or services in accordance with the contract
documents, within the time set forth herein, and at the prices stated below. These prices cover all expenses
incurred in providing the equipment, accessories, materials and/or services under the contract documents, of
which this bid is a part, and F.O.B. delivery of same to BJCC, Birmingham, Alabama.
Base Bid Amount
$___________________________________________
Alternate #1 LED Light Fixtures
(add) (deduct)
Unit Price #1: Undercut
Cubic Yard (CY) 1,000 CY $_________ __________
Unit Price #2: Asphalt Milling and Overlay
Square Yard (SY) 350 SY $__________
Unit Price #3: Removal of Ex. Fence on VFW Property
Linear Feel (SY)
$_________________________
_________
550 SY $__________ _________
If bidding an alternate please include size, packaging and a complete information sheet.
Prompt Payment Discount _________% NET ________ Days
This bid cannot be considered valid unless signed and dated by an authorized agent of the Bidder.
Company Name:
___________________________________________________________
Signature:
___________________________________________________________
Printed Name:
___________________________________________________________
Title:
___________________________________________________________
Date:
___________________________________________________________
Page 22 of 23
Exhibit 4
ACCOUNTING OF SALES TAX
Attachment to Bid Response
To:
Project:
Date:
Sales Tax Accounting
Pursuant to Code of Alabama (1975) Section 40-9-14.1, the Contractor accounts for the sales tax NOT included
in the bid proposal form as follows:
ESTIMATED SALES TAX AMOUNT
Base Bid Amount
Alternate #1 LED Light Fixtures
$______________________________________
(add) (deduct) $_________________________
Failure to provide an accounting of Sales Tax shall render the bid non-responsive. Other than determining
responsiveness, sales tax accounting shall not affect the bid pricing nor be considered in the determination of
the lowest responsible and responsive bidder.
Legal Name of Bidder _________________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address ______________________________________________________________________________
*By (Legal Signature) __________________________________________________________________________
*Name (Type or Print) _____________________________
(Seal)
*Title ___________________________________________
*Telephone ______________________________________
Page 23 of 23
SECTION 00 7200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A.
The Work contemplated by this Specification and the accompanying Drawings consists of
construction and completion of BJCC Parking Lot P13 Enhancements, Architect-Engineer's Job
No. 03356-00.000.
B.
Unless otherwise specified the Drawings and Specifications are intended to include everything
obviously requisite and necessary to the proper completion of the Work. Accordingly, all work is
to be done under all headings in connection with the Work to carry out the Drawings and
Specifications whether each item is mentioned herein or not.
C.
The clauses in these General Conditions shall apply to all parts of the Work.
D.
Where sheet numbers of Drawings are mentioned in the Specification in connection with the
various headings, it is for the purpose of supplementing the description contained in the
Specification and as a convenience to the Contractor in taking off quantities and referring to the
work described. Sheet numbers so listed are not intended to limit the scope of the Work to be
performed under this Contract.
E.
General Definitions - Wherever used in any of the contract documents, the following meanings
shall be given to the terms herein defined:
1. Contract Documents
a. These consist of Agreement, General Conditions, Drawings and Specifications,
including all modifications thereof incorporated in documents before their execution.
b. These form the contract.
2. Agreement
a. The Agreement executed by Contractor and Owner.
3. Owner
a. Birmingham – Jefferson Convention Complex.
4. Contractor
a. Party named in Agreement who will execute the work as specified herein.
5. Construction Manager
a. Construction Manager for the Project.
6. General Contractor
a. Contractor for Architectural Work.
7. Subcontractor
a. This includes those having a contract with Contractor, who furnishes material worked
according to drawings and specifications of this work, but does not include one who
merely furnishes materials.
8. Architect, Architect-Engineer, Engineer, or Design Professional
a. The above terms shall be considered synonymous and, where used in contract
documents, shall have reference to T.R.I Architecture & Interior Design, LLC.
9. Owner's Field Representative
a. Owner’s Field Representative is assigned to the site of the project.
10. Work Not Included
a. Any items marked N.I.C. (meaning Not in Contract), or, by Owner, on the drawing or
specified as being furnished by Owner, are not included.
F.
General Description of the Work.
1. The work to which this Specification pertains consists of the All Trades Work for a Parking
Lot development, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and described in the
Specifications.
G.
Special Notes.
1. Contractor's access and egress from the site shall be as directed by the Owner.
00 7200 - 1
June 16, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
The All Trades Contractor shall furnish and maintain any all-weather temporary roads,
parking, and maintain any additional all-weather temporary roads as needed and take all
other measures necessary for moving his equipment onto and through the site to permit
work to continue during all weather conditions.
The Work will not be located within an secured area, therefore, the Contractor will be
responsible for the security of all tools, equipment and safety provisions during the course
of performing the Work.
The Contractor's employee parking area and Contractor's construction office shall be
located on site as directed by the Owner.
There will be no rail siding on or to the site.
Intent of Specifications and Drawings
1. The Specifications and Drawings are intended to describe the work and to furnish
sufficient information to indicate what is necessary for construction of the work, complete
in all details.
2. Except as otherwise stated in the contract, Contractor shall provide and pay for all
permits, taxes, insurance, materials, labor, tools equipment, water, light, heat, power,
transportation, supervision, temporary construction, and all services and facilities of every
nature whatsoever necessary for performance of the contract, complete and within agreed
time.
3. The Specifications and Drawings are intended to be complementary, and what is called for
by either shall be as binding upon Contractor as if called for by both.
4. The work shall be complete in every detail, however, should any work or any material be
required which is not denoted in the specification or on the drawings either directly or
indirectly, but which is nevertheless necessary for proper carrying out of intent thereof,
including variations as may be necessary to conform to conditions of actual construction,
Contractor agrees the same to be implied and required and shall perform all work and
furnish all such material as fully as if they were particularly delineated or described without
additional cost to Owner.
5. Contractor shall not take advantage of any manifestly unintentional error, omission, or
inconsistency, should such exist.
6. Should any such error, omission, or inconsistency appear in the Specifications or in
Drawings, Contractor, before proceeding with work, shall bring Architect-Engineer's
attention to same for proper determination, and in no case shall Contractor proceed with
the work in uncertainty.
7. In case of such error, omission or inconsistency, unless there is sufficient evidence
reasonably to establish otherwise, the provisions of the agreement will take precedence
over the specification and provisions of the specification will take precedence over the
drawings, in case of inconsistencies between scales and figures, the figured dimensions
on drawings will govern, and large-scale details will take precedence over small-scale
details; in each instance, only to the extent necessary to resolve such error, omission or
inconsistency.
8. Large-scale or full-size details, when furnished by Architect-Engineer to Contractor after
award of contract, will be developed from the scale drawings.
9. Should such details differ from the intent of scale drawings or not be reasonably inferable
therefrom and such difference result in additional expense to Contractor, Contractor shall,
immediately upon receipt of such details, call Architect-Engineer’s attention to the same,
in writing, for proper determination.
10. No adjustment in contract price in respect thereof will be made to Contractor unless
Contractor receives a written order with respect thereto from Architect-Engineer before
starting the work covered by said detail.
11. With respect to any parts of work for which only a portion is completely drawn or detailed
or which are indicated on drawings for any particular area or location, all like work shall
conform to the portions so drawn or detailed and shall be deemed to continue throughout
like areas or locations and shall include only such variations therefrom approved by
00 7200 - 2
June 16, 2016
Architect-Engineer as required to conform to conditions of actual construction, unless
distinctly shown or noted otherwise.
12. While work described in the specification may be divided into sections, headings, and
subheadings, Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to provide a
complete piece of work as contemplated by the Specifications and Drawings.
13. Any item called for under any one Specification subdivision must be supplied even though
it is not called for again under the subdivision for the particular work.
14. Regardless of such subdivision by sections, headings, and subheadings as they appear in
the Specifications, Contractor shall be responsible for classification and allocation of the
performance of work and of furnishing of all labor and material.
I.
Number of Drawings and Specifications
1. The Architect-Engineer has furnished electronic drawings to BJCC
2. If addenda are issued, the Architect-Engineer will furnish electronic documents to BJCC
3. The Architect-Engineer will not issue an award set of Construction Documents. Rather,
the original issuance of bidding documents together with the addenda will become the
Construction Documents (Specifications and Drawings) for this Work.
4. If changes and/or clarifications to the Work are required after award of the Contract, the
Architect-Engineer will issue bulletins and will furnish the Contractor with electronic file.
5. After the Construction Manager has been selected by Owner, all documentation above
mentioned for changes and/or clarifications will be furnished only to the Construction
Manager, who shall be responsible for the forwarding of same to the Contractor.
6. The drawings and specifications furnished hereunder shall not be used on other work, nor
shall the Contractor or subcontractor make any copies thereof without written permission
of the Architect-Engineer.
1.02 CONTRACTOR
A.
Contractor's Responsibility
1. Contractor shall be responsible for the work and every part thereof, for methods, means
and equipment used in performing the contract and for all materials, tools, apparatus and
property of every description used in connection therewith.
2. Contractor assumes all risks, hazards and conditions in connection with the performance
of the contract, including, but without being limited thereto, weather, delays in delivery of
material or equipment, embargoes, strikes and/or labor disturbances directed against
Contractor or subcontractors.
B.
Contractor to Assist Architect-Engineer
1. Contractor shall render all necessary assistance to Architect-Engineer and when
requested, or as otherwise required, shall take and furnish Architect-Engineer with levels,
measurements, etc., with reference to the work or premises.
2. Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe and proper facilities at all times for the inspection
of the work by Architect-Engineer.
C.
Measurement and Fitting of Parts
1. The Contractor shall take all necessary field measurements and otherwise verify all
dimensions shown on the drawings, including the Contractor’s subcontractors’ and
manufacturers’ shop drawings.
2. Should any error or inconsistency exist, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work
affected thereby until reporting same to the Architect-Engineer and shall have received
from the Architect-Engineer clarification or correction.
3. The Contractor shall, without extra charge, make adjustable parts fit to fixed parts.
4. The Contractor shall coordinate all portions of the work under the contract prior to
fabrication and/or installation and shall do all required cutting and altering of and fitting to,
any portion of the work to make its several parts fit together and to make possible
installation of adjoining portions of the work and to fit work already in place.
D.
Contractor's Supervision
00 7200 - 3
June 16, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Contractor shall keep at the work site, during progress of work, a competent
superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner.
Superintendent shall represent Contractor on site of the work and all directions given to
that person shall be as binding as if given to Contractor.
If Contractor contends that such directions will result in an increase in cost of the work,
damage, or loss, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment by reason thereof,
Contractor shall, within 48 hours of receipt of such directions, except in an emergency
endangering life and property, notify Architect-Engineer and Owner in writing, of any
contentions, the amount of such claim with respect thereto and all details in connection
therewith, and shall not proceed upon such directions or with work affected thereby until
receiving in writing instruction to proceed.
If Contractor contends that payment is due from Owner for an increase in the cost of work,
damage, or loss, because of any action or omission of others during performance of work,
Contractor shall not delay work on account thereof and shall, within 7 days after the first
observance of such occurrence, notify Architect-Engineer and Owner, in writing, of any
contentions, the amount of claim with respect thereto, and all details in connection
therewith.
It is a condition precedent to the consideration or prosecution of claims by Contractor that
the foregoing provisions be strictly observed in each instance, and if Contractor fails to
comply, the Contractor shall be deemed to have waived the claim.
Neither the provisions of this section nor receipt of any claim by Architect-Engineer or
Owner shall constitute admission on the part of Architect-Engineer or Owner that any such
claim is valid.
Should Contractor perform any work or proceed in any manner in which Contractor may
subsequently allege has caused increased cost, damage, or loss, purporting, in each
case, to have acted upon verbal instructions or approval or with tacit consent or
acceptance, Contractor shall be held to have done so at their own peril, and Contractor
shall have no claim against Owner or Architect-Engineer on account of such increased
cost, damage or loss.
The Contractor’s superintendent in charge of the project shall periodically inspect the
entire project to make certain that all stipulations under the sections hereof entitled “Use of
Premises and Moving of Materials”, “Protection of Premises and Persons”, “Plant
Protection”, and "General."
E.
Guarantee
1. The Contractor shall execute and deliver to the Architect-Engineer, before the final
certificate will be issued, a written guarantee, in the form bound herein, that all labor and
materials furnished and work performed by the contractor are in accordance with the
requirements of the contract, including all amendments thereto - that should any defect
develop during the guarantee period, as hereinafter defined, due to improper materials
workmanship or arrangement, the same shall, upon written notice, be made good by the
Contractor without expense to the Owner, and that any other work affected in correcting
such defects shall also be made good.
2. The guarantee period shall be for 2 years unless a different period of time is expressly
stated under any section of the specification, in which case the Contractor’s guarantee
shall, with respect to such work, be for the longer or shorter period so stated.
3. The Contractor’s guarantee shall cover all work under the contract, whether or not any
portion of the work has been sublet. In the event any portion of the work is performed by
subcontractors under the Contractor, the Contractor shall obtain from all subcontractors
their written guarantees, in the form bound herein, to the Owner, covering their respective
portions of the work for the period specified, and the Contractor shall deliver these to the
Architect-Engineer together with their own guarantee. These subcontractors’ guarantees
shall be enforceable directly by the Owner, if the Owner so elects, and shall run
concurrently with the Contractor’s guarantee.
F.
Permits
1. The Owner shall obtain and pay for the general building permit.
00 7200 - 4
June 16, 2016
2.
3.
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any other permits and licenses required in
connection with the work.
The Contractor shall pay inspection fees required in performance of the work and shall
deliver required certificates of inspection to the Architect-Engineer.
G.
Taxes
1. BJCC is tax exempt institution.
H.
Cleaning of Premises
1. The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of
waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the
Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish,
the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials.
2. If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may
do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
I.
Inspection of Work Away From Premises
1. When any portion of the work is to be performed away from the premises, the Contractor
shall notify the Architect-Engineer, in reasonable time, where and when such work is to be
done, and shall make arrangements for access thereto by the Architect-Engineer in order
that the same may be inspected by the Architect-Engineer, if so desired, from time to time
before delivery thereof to the construction site.
J.
Progress Schedule and Time of Completion
1. Work shall be carried to completion by dates stated in the Contract.
2. Upon award of contract, Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect-Engineer for
approval, a progress schedule showing the proposed dates of commencement and
completion of each of the various subdivisions of work.
3. Contractor shall carry out work in accordance with the approved schedule.
4. If Contractor fails to maintain the approved schedule, or if progress or performance of
work or procedure employed in the work is such that, in the judgment of the ArchitectEngineer, work will not be completed by the time or times stated in the contract, and in
either event, the Architect-Engineer, by written notice, so advises the Contractor and the
Owner, and the Contractor has not, within 10 days from said notice remedied the situation
to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer, then, immediately upon the Owner’s request
and without additional cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall work such overtime,
additional shifts, Saturdays, Sundays, and/or holidays, and/or hire additional employees
and/or revise or implement construction procedures as may be necessary to restore
adherence to such schedule or to ensure such completion.
K.
Meetings.
1. At regular intervals hold, at the jobsite, meetings of the representatives of the various
contractors and subcontractors engaged on the Project to further the progress of the
Work.
2. Time and place of these meetings shall be established by the General Contractor with the
approval of the Owner's Field Representative.
3. The General Contractor shall call these meetings who shall require attendance by
representatives of all subcontractors. Representatives of contractors not under the
jurisdiction of the General Contractor shall also attend these and special meetings when
so requested by the General Contractor or the Owner's Field Representative.
4. The General Contractor and the Owner's Field Representative shall each have the right to
call additional or special meetings.
5. The General Contractor shall keep a written record of each such meeting and shall
transmit copies of such record, within four (4) days after each meeting, to the ArchitectEngineer and to all contractors and subcontractors interested in the matters covered.
6. The Contractor shall submit a rough draft of the report of each meeting, prior to its being
published and distributed, for the Architect-Engineer's review and approval.
00 7200 - 5
June 16, 2016
7.
All contractors shall furnish to the Owner's Field Representative, immediately upon
request, all available information concerning the conditions and progress of their work.
1.03 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
A.
Contractor's Status.
1. The Owner will assign this Contract to the Construction Manager or General Contractor.
This assignment will be a total assignment, including assignment for monthly and final
payments.
2. The Contractor agrees that upon such assignment, he shall work with and for the
Construction Manager or General Contractor in the same manner as he would had the
Contract been originally awarded to him by the Construction Manager or General
Contractor and, further, that he will be bound to and assume toward that Construction
Manager or General Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities that he, by his
Contract, assumes towards the Owner.
B.
Architect-Engineer's Status
1. The Architect-Engineer will assist the Owner in the General Administration of the contract,
acting in any and all of the various capacities assigned to the Architect-Engineer in the
contract. The Architect-Engineer shall have access to the work at all times and shall have
the right to reject or condemn all materials furnished and/or installed and/or work
performed which do not meet the requirements of the contract.
2. The Architect-Engineer may assign a Field Representative to follow the construction work,
to keep the Owner informed as to performance of the work and compliance by the
contractors with requirements of their contracts, to assist the Contractor in interpreting the
specifications and drawings and to act in any and all of the various capacities assigned to
the Architect-Engineer’s Field Representative in the General Conditions and in the
Specification, or, in lieu thereof, the Owner may assign a representative whose status
under the contract shall be the same as that of the Architect-Engineer’s Field
Representative.
3. The fact that the Architect-Engineer or the Architect-Engineer’s Field Representative has
not made early discovery of faulty work or of work performed at variance with the contract
requirements or of work omitted or that the Architect-Engineer's Field Representative has
permitted faulty work to be done or has permitted work to be done which is at variance
with the contract requirements or has permitted omissions in the work shall not bar the
Architect-Engineer from subsequently rejecting or condemning such faulty work or work
done which is at variance with the contract requirements nor the Owner from insisting that
the Contractor correct such work and complete work omitted. Regardless of when such
discovery, rejection and/or condemnation may be made and regardless of when the
Contractor may be ordered to correct and/or complete such work, the Contractor shall
have not claim against the Owner for an increase in the contract price, nor shall the
Contractor, subcontractors or any persons directly or indirectly engaged or employed by
any of them have any claim thereof or for correcting faulty work or work which is at
variance with the contract requirements and/or in completing work omitted.
4. The Contractor shall secure, protect, defend, hold harmless, and indemnify the Owner and
the Architect-Engineer and any of their respective agents, servants and employees from
all claims and liability whatsoever resulting from bodily injury, sickness, or disease
(including death resulting at any time therefrom) of any persons or persons arising out of
the contract and for damage, loss, destruction of any property, or expense which may
arise on account of or as the result of faulty work, or work performed which is at variance
with the contract requirements or work omitted, regardless of whether such damage, loss
or expense has occurred prior to, during or subsequent to the discovery, rejection and/or
condemnation of faulty work, or of work which is at variance with the contract
requirements or of work omitted.
5. Whenever in these General Conditions the Contractor has agreed or undertaken to hold
harmless the Architect-Engineer from liability and/or loss, damage, and expense, or it is
provided that the Contractor shall have no claim against the Architect-Engineer, it is
intended that the Architect-Engineer shall have the rights of a third party beneficiary and
00 7200 - 6
June 16, 2016
6.
shall be entitled to the benefit of said undertakings, agreements and provisions,
notwithstanding that the Architect-Engineer is not a signatory to the contract between the
Owner and the Contractor and has not furnished a consideration to the Contractor.
Where the contract, including amendments thereto, provides for decisions,
determinations, orders, certifications, directors or other actions by the Architect-Engineer
and/or the Architect-Engineer’s Field Representative, the same shall be final and binding
upon the Contractor and the Owner.
1.04 SUBCONTRACTORS
A.
Assignment and Subletting of Contracts
1. Contractor shall not assign nor sublet the contract as a whole without written approval of
Owner, nor shall Contractor assign or sublet any part of the work without the prior written
approval of Owner or owner of the specific party to whom it is proposed to assign or sublet
the same.
2. Upon request of Architect-Engineer, or, in any event, within a reasonable time after award
of contract, Contractor shall submit to Architect-Engineer in writing, names of
subcontractors proposed for use on any part or parts of the work.
3. Prior to award of any subcontract by Contractor, Contractor shall obtain from
subcontractor and submit for approval to Owner and Architect-Engineer, unit prices and
methods of measurement (not otherwise provided in the contract), as well as percentage
fees applicable under Section 'Alterations and Additions'.
4. In any and all subcontracts entered into between Contractor and subcontractors,
Contractor shall bind each subcontractor to accept, and each subcontractor shall agree to
accept, all provisions and requirements of the contract applicable to work under the
subcontract and performance thereof.
5. The Contractor shall not assign all or any part of the Contract, or any sums due or to
become due under the Contract, unless the instrument of assignment shall contain a
clause substantially to the effect that the rights of the assignee shall be subject to all the
terms and conditions of the Contract and of all instruments that are now or may hereafter
be amendatory thereof, or supplemental thereto, and to the rights and remedies of the
Owner thereunder, or arising by operation of law, and to the liens of all persons, firms, and
corporations for services rendered or materials supplied in connection with performance of
the Contract, and then only upon written consent of the Owner. Upon request of the
Owner, the Contractor shall furnish evidence, satisfactory to the Owner, that the
assignment contains the clause described herein.
6. No consent of approval of subletting or of assignment shall release or relieve the
Contractor of any of the obligations and liabilities assumed by the Contractor under the
Contract, and, as between the Owner and the Contractor, the Contractor shall remain
responsible and liable for all acts and omissions of employees, for the acts and omissions
of assignee and for the acts and omissions of subcontractors and of all person either
directly or indirectly employed by them the same as if no subletting or assignment had
been made. No such consent or approval nor any provision in the Contract shall create
any contractual relation between the Owner and any subcontractor or assignee.
1.05 CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
Alterations and Additions
1. The Architect-Engineer and the Owner shall have the right, and the Contractor
acknowledges such right, to require alterations in additions to and deductions from the
work without alterations, additions, or deductions may be described in a bulletin, with or
without accompanying drawings, issued by the Architect-Engineer or in the written order
itself. The Contractor, when so ordered in writing, shall proceed promptly in accordance
with said order and the contract price shall be adjusted, as the case may require, for such
changes in accordance with the provisions hereinafter stated.
2. Unless the adjustment in contract price has been previously agreed upon and is stated in
written order, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect-Engineer, within 21 calendar
days from receipt thereof, a firm quotation in writing. Such quotation shall be based on a
00 7200 - 7
June 16, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
fair and reasonable evaluation of the work added or omitted and shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect-Engineer and the acceptance of the Owner.
The Contractor’s quotation thereon shall be enumerated in detail as to labor, materials
and other items, and shall be supported by any further information, which the Contractor
may request, to permit checking by the Contractor or by some other competent person
appointed by the Contractor.
The value of work shall be computed on the basis of unit prices if unit prices are stated in
the contract, and, for such portions of the work as are not covered by unit prices on the
basis of estimated cost of labor and material, or, when directed, on the basis of actual cost
to the Contractor, all as hereinafter provided under “Methods of Evaluation”.
When such bulletin or written order comprises several distinct and separate items of work,
the net aggregate quantities of like materials and labor hours included in all items should
be determined and, except as paragraph (3) of Method (a) Unit Prices may apply, the
appropriate unit price or unit cost, as the case may be, shall be applied to such net
aggregate quantities, and such claim for credit shall be adjusted to the mutual satisfaction
of the Contractor and the Owner before final payment will be made.
When ordered by the Owner whether to accelerate the completion date or dates overtime
and/or additional shifts and, except where such order is given pursuant to the Contractor’s
delinquency in performance of the project schedule, the Contractor shall be reimbursed by
the Owner for net premium costs of such overtime and/or shifts so ordered and worked,
but not including additional overhead or profit.
The Contractor shall include all subcontracts, and otherwise as may be necessary,
provisions to secure subcontractors’ estimates, quotations and material prices to comply
with the foregoing requirements.
Methods of Evaluation:
a. Unit Prices
1) Unit prices shall be net to the Owner for work in place and shall include all
applicable taxes, insurance, overhead and profit, as well as all charges for
incidental expenses, such as hoisting, cleaning, pointing, cleaning up rubbish,
etc., the intention being to leave the respective items finished, the same as
required for similar work under the original specification and General Conditions.
Such unit prices shall govern for additions and deductions in connection with the
buildings, structures, and installations covered by the specification and drawings
and also, if the Owner so elects, for other work located on the premises,
incidental or necessary to the use of said buildings, structures, or installations,
which may be required.
2) For changes in quantity of the same material, the appropriate unit price in the
contract shall be applied to the net change.
3) For substitutions of one material for another in the same location, the differential
between the deduct unit prices shall be used, except:
(a) When such substitution involves a change in the subcontractor performing
the work, or a change from a subcontractor to the Contractor, or a change
from the Contractor to a subcontractor, and the value of the work is
increased as a result of such substitution, then the differential between the
add unit prices shall be used.
b. Estimated Cost Plus Fee:
1) For additions and revisions to the work to be performed by the Contractor’s own
forces, and not covered by unit prices. If the Owner so elects, the price shall be
based on the estimated cost of labor and materials (less all monetary discounts)
plus rental for the use of such items of equipment as are properly allocable to
the work and as have an individual value when new in excess of five hundred
dollars plus taxes and insurance applicable thereto, plus bond premiums. For
additional work or revisions resulting in additional work, there shall be added to
the price as approved by the Contractor, the Contractor’s fee as stated in the
contract, which fee shall constitute all of the Contractor’s charges for
00 7200 - 8
June 16, 2016
c.
supervision, field office expense, the making of all shop drawings, the services
of any necessary draftsmen, engineers, and layout men, tools (large and small),
job and other overhead as well as profit. The Contractor’s fee shall be applied to
the net estimated cost of labor, materials, and equipment rental only, exclusive
of applicable insurance, taxes, and bond premiums.
2) For additions and revisions to the work to be performed by subcontractors under
the Contractor, and not covered by unit prices, the value of such work shall be
computed by the subcontractors in the same manner as described in paragraph
a) preceding (except that subcontractor’s fees shall be as approved by the
Contractor and the Owner), and shall be checked and approved by the
Contractor before submitting same for the Contractor’s check and approval. For
additional work or revisions resulting in additional work, there shall be added to
the net aggregate of such subcontractors’ prices as approved by the Contractor,
the Contractor’s charges for supervision, engineering, field office expense, job
and other overhead as well as profit.
3) Where revisions involve both additions and deductions, the values for labor and
materials added and deducted shall be balanced against each other and the
fees shall be applied to the net result of such balance in values when such result
is an addition.
Actual Cost Plus Fee:
1) Should the Owner so elect, the Contractor shall perform and shall require each
subcontractor to perform revisions and additions to the work at the actual cost of
labor and materials, plus fee as described in Estimated Cost Plus Fee, and the
Contractor shall keep and present, in such manner as the Contractor may direct
an accurate account of all costs.
(a) The actual cost to the Contractor of all labor performed on and materials
furnished for and used in the above work (less all monetary discounts) and
the rental cost to the Contractor for the use of such items of equipment
which are properly allocable to the work and as have an individual value,
when new, in excess of five hundred dollars.
(b) All sums paid by the Contractor for royalties, permits and inspection fees.
(c) All premiums for Contractor’s public liability insurance, Workers’
Compensation, fire and other proper and necessary insurance, as well as
all applicable payroll taxes.
(d) The actual amounts of the subcontractors’ costs, which costs shall be
confined to items comparable to those allowed the Contractor under
paragraphs a), b) and c) preceding, plus the subcontractors’ fees as
approved by the Contractor and the Owner. These fees shall be applied to
the cost of labor, materials, and equipment rental only and shall constitute
all of the subcontractors’ charges for overhead and profit, including, but not
limited to, items comparable to those enumerated in Paragraph e) following.
(e) The Contractor’s fees mentioned in the contract which constitute profit and
all charges for overhead, both direct and indirect, including, but not limited
to:
(1) The services of the Contractor, the Contractor’s general office
organization and the services of the Contractor’s superintendent (but
not the foremen employed continuously at the building on this work).
(2) All field office expenses.
(3) The use of all tools required for the execution of the work.
(4) The making of all shop drawings.
(5) The services of any necessary draftsmen, engineers and layout men.
(f) The expenses of making good any damage to the work or premises and the
removal and replacement of materials or work rejected or condemned by
the Architect-Engineer as failing to conform with the requirements of the
specification and drawings which, in the judgment of the Architect-Engineer,
00 7200 - 9
June 16, 2016
d.
has resulted from a lack of reasonable diligence on the part of the
Contractor or the Contractor’s subcontractors, shall be borne by the
Contractor and shall not be charged as items of cost.
(g) Should the Architect-Engineer or Owner order the Contractor to proceed
with revisions or additions to the work involving the use of Method No. 2
prior to the submission, approval and acceptance of the Contractor’s
quotation as hereinbefore provided, the Contractor shall keep an accurate
account of costs of the work so ordered, together with all supporting
vouchers, in the same manner as required under Method No. 3. Upon the
submission, approval and acceptance of the Contractor's quotation, the
Contractor shall continue and complete the work so ordered for the
approved price and shall not be required to keep any further account of
actual costs. Should the price involving the use of Method No. 2 not be
approved by the Architect-Engineer or not be acceptable to the Owner,
then, except as otherwise ordered by the Architect-Engineer or the Owner,
the Contractor shall continue and complete, and shall require all
subcontractors to continue and complete, and said revisions and additions
on the basis of actual cost as provided in Method No. 3, and shall present
to the Owner an account of the Contractor’s and subcontractors’ costs,
together with all supporting vouchers. Said accounts shall be subject to
audit by the Owner.
(h) No claim by the Contractor for increased compensation for alterations or
additions shall be considered unless done pursuant to advance written
authorization from the Architect-Engineer or Owner (drawings without
written order shall not constitute such authority), and unless written notice
of such claim is made to the Architect-Engineer before commencement of
such work.
Bills for Extras
1) Bills for extra work authorized in writing by the Owner or Architect-Engineer
(other than additional work provided for in the contract) shall be itemized in
detail as to labor, material, and other charges and shall be submitted to the
Architect-Engineer in writing on demand, and in any event, before final
certificate for payment on account of the contract will be issued. Unless
otherwise agreed, no payment of such bills will be made until final settlement.
1.06 TIME
A.
Delays and Extension of Time
1. As used in this section and elsewhere in the General Conditions, the term 'delays' shall
mean 'hindrances or delays, whether avoidable or unavoidable'.
2. Contractor agrees to assume all risks of delays in the performance and completion of work
under contract and agree that there shall be no remedy for delay except catastrophic
weather conditions nor shall Contractor be granted an extension of time for delays
resulting from interruptions to or suspensions of the work to enable other contractors to
perform their work.
3. Should Contractor contend that an extension of time is justified for completion of any
portion or portions, or the whole of the work, under provisions of the third paragraph
hereof, Contractor shall, within 48 hours of occurrence of the cause of the delay, notify
Owner and Architect-Engineer, concurrently in writing, of such contention, setting forth:
a. The cause for the delay;
b. A description of the portion or portions of the work affected thereby, and; all details
pertinent thereto.
c. A subsequent written application for the specific number of days extension of time
requested shall be made by Contractor to Architect-Engineer and Owner within 48
hours after the cause for the delay has ceased to exist.
4. Contractor agrees that, regardless of the cause of delay and whether or not any extension
of time may be granted therefore, Contractor shall continue to prosecute all work not
00 7200 - 10
June 16, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
directly affected by said cause of the delay, and with respect to such portion or portions of
the work as may be so affected, shall take all reasonable measures to minimize the effect
of said cause of the delay.
It is a condition precedent to consideration or prosecution of any claim for an extension of
time that the foregoing provisions be strictly adhered to in each instance and, if Contractor
fails to comply, Contractor shall be deemed to have waived the claim.
Within 7 days after receipt by Architect-Engineer of Contractors written notice or written
application for a specific number of days extension time, Architect-Engineer shall
acknowledge receipt of such notice or application, in writing to Contractor and Owner).
At the time of such acknowledgement, or within a reasonable time thereafter, ArchitectEngineer shall certify or deny the validity of Contractor‘s claim for an extension of time,
and if certified, Architect-Engineer shall approve or modify the number of days of such
extension requested by Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish all information requested by Architect-Engineer to assist in making
the decision.
Contractor agrees that whether or not any delay shall be the basis for an extension of
time, Contractor shall have no claim against Owner for an increase in the contract sum,
nor a claim against Owner or Architect-Engineer for a payment or allowance of any kind
for damage, loss or expense resulting from delays, nor shall Contractor have any claim for
damage, loss or expense resulting from interruptions to, or suspension of Contractor’s
work to enable other contractors to perform their work.
1.07 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
A.
Schedule of Values and Allocation of Owner's Cost
1. Divisions and subdivisions of work entering into the contract, to be used as the basis for
partial payments. This schedule of values shall be in such form as may be approved by
the Architect-Engineer and shall aggregate the total contract price.
2. The Architect-Engineer shall have the right to require the Contractor to alter the value of
the individual items listed on the schedule at any time if the same shall appear to be
incorrect or unbalanced, but no such alterations shall affect the total contract price.
3. The Contractor shall, without additional charge, furnish from time to time, as requested,
such additional segregation of values as may be required by the Owner for the purpose of
costs of the various individual buildings, structures, and each equipment installation
therein or connected therewith.
B.
Applications for Payment
1. Applications by the Contractor for partial payment as the work progresses shall be
submitted to the Architect-Engineer for review.
2. Each application shall be accompanied by:
a. A written, tabulated estimate by the Contractor, of the value of work completed to the
date thereof, based on the approved schedule of values for various portions of the
work and all authorized additions and deductions to the contract price, which estimate
shall represent the proportion which the work completed bears to the total work, and;
b. A sworn statement by the Contractor as to the status of all labor, material and
subcontract accounts as of the date of the application. The Contractor may, if the
Architect-Engineer generally approves, include in said estimate, as work completed,
the value of materials or prepared work delivered to the site but not installed in
accordance with the terms of the contract. Partial payment shall be made monthly to
the extent of ninety percent (90%) of the value of work completed, less the aggregate
of all previous payments.
3. No materials, equipment, or prepared work, delivered upon the premises, whether or not
payment has been made on account thereof, shall be removed from the premises without
the prior written consent of the Owner’s Field Representative or the Owner.
4. No certificate shall be issued in favor of the Contractor for materials not delivered upon the
premises.
C.
Decisions to Withhold Certification
00 7200 - 11
June 16, 2016
1.
2.
The Architect-Engineer shall have the right to withhold certificates for payment if, in the
Architect-Engineer’s judgment the work is not being done or progressing satisfactorily until
such time as the progress or character of the work has, in the Architect-Engineer's
judgment, been made satisfactory.
The Architect-Engineer shall also has the right to withhold or, on account of subsequently
discovered evidence, to nullify the whole or a part of any certificate to such extent as may
be necessary to protect the Owner from a loss on account of:
a. Defective work not remedied, or work not meeting the requirements of the contract.
b. A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid.
c. Damage to another contractor.
D.
Owner's Access and Partial Occupancy
1. Owner and Owner’s representatives shall have access to the work at all times. Owner, at
Owner’s election, may from time to time occupy any of the units or parts of the project as
the work in connection therewith is completed to such a degree as will, in the judgment of
Owner, permit of their temporary or permanent use. Owner will, within a reasonable time
prior to any such partial occupancy, give written notice to the Contractor or the
Contractor’s superintendent thereof and such occupancy shall be upon the following
terms:
a. The guarantee periods shall not begin to run until completion of the work.
b. Such occupancy shall not constitute an acceptance of the work or any portion thereof
nor shall such occupancy relieve the Contractor of liability to perform any work
required by the contract, but not completed at the time of occupancy.
c. Contractor shall not be responsible for wear and tear or damage resulting from such
partial occupancy.
d. Contractor shall, if ordered by Owner in writing, provide additional material and
equipment and/or furnished added heat, light, water or other services (including
maintenance) as stated in the written order, and Owner shall make proper
remuneration therefore to Contractor.
E.
Final Payment
1. Upon completion of all the work under the contract and acceptance thereof by the
Contractor or the Owner, the Contractor shall make application for final payment. The
application shall be accompanied by:
a. The Contractor’s written statement of the amount due;
b. The Contractor's sworn statement as to the status of all labor, material and
subcontract accounts;
c. The Contractor’s Waiver of Lien in full, and;
d. All required guarantees in accordance with the terms of the contract.
2. The final payment shall not become due and payable until the Contractor, if requested by
the Owner, shall have delivered to the Owner evidence satisfactory to the Owner, that the
subcontractors and all labor material bills in connection with the work have been paid in
full in lieu thereof, and a sworn statement that the release and/or receipts cover all labor
and materials for which a lien could be filed.
3. The Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full,
furnish a bond, satisfactory to the Owner, to indemnify the Owner against any lien of such
subcontractor.
F.
Liens
1. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable lien laws of the state in which the work is
being performed. As a condition of any payments by the Owner, the Contractor shall
procure from each and every subcontractor and supplier of material or labor, a waiver of
lien or a release of any claim to a lien which they or any of them may have under the lien
laws of the state in which the work is being done, and shall together with each and every
other document, sworn statement or assurance which, in the opinion of the Owner, is
necessary or appropriate to establish that the property is free from liens on account of
00 7200 - 12
June 16, 2016
2.
3.
4.
anything which is done by the Contractor, or those acting under the Contractor or
subcontractors, in the performance of the work under the contract and any and all orders
for additions and revisions thereto.
The same has been asserted of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with the
performance or default in performance of the contract, and if the Owner or representatives
of the Owner or any property of either or any property installed on the premises, might be
or become liable for the discharge or satisfaction of such lien or claim, then the Owner
shall have the right to retain out of any payment then due or thereafter to become due, in
addition to the amounts otherwise retained under the contract, an amount sufficient to
discharge such lien or satisfy such claim and to reimburse the Owner and/or the
representatives of the Owner for all costs and expenses in connection therewith, including
cost of bonds and reasonable attorney fees, and shall notify the Contractor of such
retention. The Owner, with sole discretion, shall have the right to apply any amounts
retained to discharge or satisfy such lien or claim and pay all costs and expenses in
connection therewith, unless, within 20 days after said notice:
a. The Contractor has said lien or claim discharged or satisfied, or;
b. Some other procedure proposed by the Contractor and satisfactory to the Owner, is
adopted to effect, within a reasonable period of time, the discharge or satisfaction of
said lien or claim.
If the amounts retained are insufficient for the aforesaid purpose, or if any such lien or
claim remains undischarged or unsatisfied after all payments have been made to the
Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all sums in excess of the
retained amounts, if any, or for the amounts that the Owner paid to discharge such lien or
satisfy such claims, including the costs and expenses and reasonable attorneys’ fees in
connection therewith.
The Contractor shall include a provision satisfying the requirements hereinbefore specified
as part of any and all subcontracts entered into for the Work or any portion thereof.
1.08 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A.
General.
1. The Contractor shall comply with the "Safety and Engineering Practices" as set forth in the
"Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" as published by the Associated General
Contractors of America, and, with all applicable Federal, State, and local safety and
sanitary laws, regulations, and ordinances, as well as the established safety rules and
practices of the Owner.
2. Without limiting the Contractor's responsibility for compliance with any other laws,
regulations, or ordinances which are in effect, the Contractor shall comply with the
requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act and/or the state standards
approved by the federal government to supplant OSHA in the state in which the
construction is being performed.
3. The methods and equipment used by the Contractor shall be safe and adequate for
securing the safety of workers or other persons who may be endangered thereby and the
responsibility for the safety of workers or other persons shall be that of the Contractor.
4. The Contractor shall not endanger, by cutting, digging, or otherwise, any structures,
installations, facilities or work in progress or completed.
5. The Contractor shall properly protect Owner's and adjoining property from injury and,
except as provided under the Section hereof entitled "Owner's and Contractor's
Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards," shall make good, at
own expense, any damage to same without delay. The Contractor shall exercise particular
care to protect all trees which are to remain, including roots of same.
6. The Contractor shall provide and properly maintain warning signs and lights, barricades,
railings, and other safeguards for the protection of workers, delivery personnel, and
others, including the general public, on, about or adjacent to the Work as required by the
Conditions and progress of the Work and in connection therewith openings in the floors or
roof within the working areas shall be temporarily covered or securely railed off.
00 7200 - 13
June 16, 2016
7.
The Contractor shall properly close all openings and protect all open areas from the
weather and shall take every precaution necessary and required in connection with the
performance of the Contract to protect equipment and the occupancy and use of the
existing premises and/or work in progress and/or completed work from damage, dirt, dust,
weather, and other conditions detrimental thereto, or to the performance of work by
others, until completion and acceptance of the Work.
B.
Fire Protection
1. The Contractor and/or General Contractor shall maintain free access to the building areas
for fire fighting equipment and shall at no time block off main roadways or fire aisles
without providing adequate auxiliary roadways and means of entrance for fire fighting
equipment, including heavy fire department trucks, where applicable.
2. The General Contractor shall, during the entire construction period and until completion of
the work, provide and maintain the following material, equipment, and services necessary
for an adequate fire protection and fire-fighting system which shall meet with the approval
of the Owner or the Owner's Field Representative, and shall, as a minimum, meet the
requirements and conditions herein enumerated. These requirements shall be augmented
and/or the installations relocated, as may be necessary to meet, at all times, the demands
of adequate protection in all areas and shall not be reduced prior to such completion
without the written permission of the Owner.
3. Provide and maintain during construction at least one (1) fire extinguisher for each 2500
square feet of floor and roof area, however, in any event not less than 4 extinguishers per
floor and per roof of each separate building or structure. Fire extinguishers shall be in
good working order, conveniently locate, clearly visible, and readily accessible for proper
protection of the Work. The number of fire extinguishers shall be increased in such
locations and during such times as there are concentrated combustible materials, such as
form lumber, stored, being placed, or in place, until stripped and removed from the
particular location.
4. Fire extinguishers shall be of an approved type (equivalent to the 2-1/2 gallon water
pressurized), suitable for the hazards to be encountered. In areas of flammable liquid,
asphalt, or electrical hazards, extinguishers shall be equivalent to the carbon dioxide type
or dry chemical type. During freezing weather extinguishers shall be enclosed in heated
cabinets or be of antifreeze type.
5. Each Contractor shall provide and maintain fire extinguishers in their temporary structures.
C.
Damage to Work
1. Except as specially provided under Section 'Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
Hazards', Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by Contractor’s work,
Contractor’s workers, or subcontractors.
2. Make good damaged work and other work affected thereby.
1.09 INSURANCE AND BONDS
A.
1.
Contractor and all subcontractors shall, during continuance of work under the contract,
including extra work in connection therewith, maintain the following insurance coverage:
a. Worker’s Compensation, Employer’s Liability Insurance, and any insurance required
by any employee benefit acts or other statutes applicable where work is to be
performed.
b. Comprehensive General Liability and Property Damage Insurance (including
Contractor’s Protective), in any amounts required by Owner, but not less than
$500,000 per person, and $1,000,000 per occurrence for General Liability and
$500,000 for property damage per occurrence, as protection against all risks of
damage or destruction of property or bodily injury, sickness or disease (including
death resulting at any time therefrom) of persons, wherever located, resulting from
any action, omission or operation under the contract or in connection with the work.
c. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, including property damage, covering
all owned or rented equipment used in connection with the work, in amounts not less
00 7200 - 14
June 16, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
than $500,000 per person and $1,000,000 per occurrence for bodily injury (including
death resulting at any time therefrom) and $100,000 per occurrence for property
damage.
All such insurance shall be in amounts sufficient to protect Contractor and subcontractors
from any liability that a may arise by virtue of any statute or law in force or which may
hereafter be enacted.
All insurance policies shall be issued by companies authorized to do business under the
laws of the state in which work will be done.
Such policies shall contain appropriate endorsements extending coverage thereof to
include liability assumed by Contractor under the contract.
Before work is started, Contractor shall file with Owner certificates of insurance coverage
required to be maintained by Contractor, evidencing such insurance and endorsement.
No change or cancellation in insurance shall be made without 10 days prior written notice
to Owner, nor shall Contractor make any change or cancellation in insurance without
Owner’s prior written approval thereof.
Compliance by Contractor with the foregoing requirements as to carrying insurance and
furnishing certificates, shall not relieve Contractor of liabilities and obligations under this
section or under the Sections 'Contractor’s Responsibility', and 'Contractor’s Liability for
Bodily Injury, Sickness, Disease and Property Damage', or any other portion of the
contract.
B.
Contractor's Liability for Bodily Injury, Disease, and Property Damage
1. Except as specifically provided, with respect to property damage only, under the Section
'Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards'.
2. Contractor shall assume all risk of damage or destruction of property or of bodily injury,
sickness or disease of persons (including death resulting at any time therefrom) used or
employed on or in connection with the work, and of all damage or destruction of property
or of bodily injury, sickness, or disease of persons (including death resulting therefrom),
wherever located, resulting from any action, omission, or operation under the contract or
in connection with the work.
3. Contractor shall secure, protect, defend, hold harmless, and indemnify Owner and
Architect-Engineer and any of their respective agents, servants and employees against
any liability whatsoever, or in connection with the performance of any work in connection
with the contract.
C.
Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards
1. The Owner shall assume responsibility for maintaining fire and extended coverage
insurance, including vandalism, malicious mischief and, where applicable, sprinkler
damage to cover not less than the value of work performed and materials delivered to the
site of the Project which are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent
construction whether or not installed, except as otherwise provided in Paragraphs 6, 7,
and 8 hereof
2. Contractor shall not be liable for loss or damage to such work or materials caused by fire
or other perils hereinbefore enumerated, normally insured against by fire and extended
coverage insurance policies, and the policy and policies maintained by Owner to cover
such value shall include (without specifically naming any party other than Owner in said
policies) any interests of Contractor and subcontractors in such work performed and
material delivered.
3. Owner waives any right of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors and ArchitectEngineer for damage to or destruction of other property of Owner’s located at the
construction location due to fire and extended coverage perils.
4. Losses, if any, under such insurance and shall be payable to Owner.
5. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the
construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft, or misappropriation.
6. The foregoing provisions shall not relieve Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility
for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees,
00 7200 - 15
June 16, 2016
7.
8.
9.
under the contract incident to repair, regardless of ownership except as may be included
in and remain a part of the permanent construction.
Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned
items, or any other property of Contractor, subcontractors and Architect-Engineer, or
employees, agents, or servants of the same, which is not to be included in and remain a
part of the permanent construction.
Contractor and subcontractors waive any rights of recovery they may have against Owner
and Architect-Engineer for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or
property of their employees, or whatever kind of nature.
In connection with the foregoing waivers of right of recovery, Owner, Contractor and
subcontractors shall each, immediately upon award of contract, obtain from their
respective insurance companies in an appropriate form, waiver of subrogation against
Architect-Engineer, Owner, Contractor and subcontractors (name of each to be stated, if
necessary) as the case may be, and shall furnish to any of them upon request evidence of
such waivers of subrogation.
D.
Certificates
1. Losses, if any, under such insurance and shall be payable to the Owner.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with
construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft, or misappropriation.
3. The foregoing provisions shall not relieve the Architect-Engineer and Subcontractors or
responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their
employees, under the contract incident to the repair, regardless of ownership except as
may be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction.
4. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned
items, or any other property of Contractor, subcontractors and Architect-Engineer, or
Employees, Agents, or Servants of the same, which is not to be included in and remain a
part of the permanent construction.
5. The Contractor and Subcontractors waive any rights of recovery they may have against
the Owner and Architect-Engineer for damage or destruction of their own or rented
property, or property of their employees, or whatever kind of nature.
6. In connection with the foregoing Waivers of Right of Recovery, the Owner, the Contractor
and Subcontractors shall each, immediately upon award of the contract, obtain from their
respective insurance companies in an appropriate form, Waiver of Subrogation against the
Architect-Engineer, Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors (the name of each to be
stated, if necessary) as the case may be, and shall furnish to any of them upon request
evidence of such waivers of subrogation.
E.
Bonds
1. If requested by Owner, Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the
contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder, in such form and amounts and
with such condition as Owner may prescribe, and with such sureties as Owner may
approve, in which case the amount of the contract shall be increased by the net amount of
premiums paid.
1.10 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
A.
Removal and Correction of Work and Materials
1. All faulty work shall be made right by the Contractor without delay. The Contractor shall
immediately remove and replace all materials and work which are of unsound or unfit
character or which otherwise do not meet the requirements of the contract, shall remove,
reconstruct, or refinish, as the case may require, all materials and work which have
become damaged after they are in place, and in each instance shall make good other
work affected thereby, all requirements of the contract have been fulfilled. Should
examination of such exposed work show that the requirements of the contract have been
fulfilled, then the cost of such uncovering and reconstruction shall be paid for by the
Owner. Should examination of exposed work show the work or materials to be defective or
otherwise not meeting the requirements of the contract, then immediately upon notification
00 7200 - 16
June 16, 2016
2.
3.
by the Architect-Engineer, the Contractor shall replace and reconstruct same and costs of
all such uncovering, replacement and reconstruction shall be borne by the Contractor.
No extension of time will be allowed in connection with the correcting of faulty work.
Should the Architect-Engineer and Owner deem it inexpedient, in any particular instance,
to have the Contractor correct work which does not fully meet the contract requirements,
the Contractor, when requested in writing by the Architect-Engineer, shall offer an
allowance as a deduction from the contract amount, in lieu thereof. Acceptance by the
Owner of such allowance shall not modify the requirements of the guarantee called for by
the contract. If the allowance is not approved by the Architect-Engineer, or acceptable to
the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately proceed to correct such work to meet the
contract requirements.
1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A.
Laws, Ordinances, and Regulations
1. Contractor shall be held to be fully informed of and comply with all federal, state, and local
laws, ordinances, building rulers and regulations and other statutory provisions applicable
to the work.
2. It shall be the duty of Contractor, before starting any Work, to ascertain whether the
Specification and Drawings are at variance with any such laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations, or other statutory provisions and to notify the Architect-Engineer promptly, in
writing, of such variances, should they exist, to permit proper determination by the
Architect-Engineer.
3. If Contractor performs any Work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations,
and other statutory provisions, Contractor shall bear all costs in effecting compliance
therewith.
4. Contractor shall be liable for all damage or loss arising by reason of breach of the
provisions herein set forth and shall indemnify and hold Owner and the Architect-Engineer
harmless from any and all liability for damage or loss on account of such breach.
5. Where the Contract requires the Work, or any parts of same, to be above the standards
required by applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and other statutory
provisions pertaining to the Work, such Work shall be performed and completed by
Contractor in accordance with the Contract requirements.
B.
Notices
1. Whenever, under contract, any notice or notification is required or authorized to be given
in writing, such notice or notification shall for all intent and purposes be deemed to be duly
given and received if sent by United States registered mail, addressed to Owner,
Contractor, or Architect-Engineer, as the case may be as follows:
a. To Owner: Directed to the attention of the person having signed the agreement on its
behalf, or an officer of Owner, at address of Owner stated therein.
b. To Contractor: Directed to the attention of the person having signed the agreement
on its behalf, at address of Contractor stated therein.
c. To Architect-Engineer: Directed to the attention of the President, Executive Vice
President or Secretary, at address of Architect-Engineer stated therein.
C.
Quality of Materials and Workmanship
1. All work shall be done by person qualified in their respective craft, and the workmanship
shall be first-class in every respect. All materials and equipment furnished shall be the
best of their respective kinds for the intended use and, unless otherwise specified, same
shall be new and of the latest design. The Architect-Engineer shall make all decisions with
respect to questions concerning the quality of fitness of materials, equipment, and
workmanship.
D.
Owner's Options
1. Reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or
type of construction by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition.
00 7200 - 17
June 16, 2016
2.
However, unless the Agreement contains a statement or statements designating
acceptance of an alternate for (a) below, and/or a price adjustment for (b) below, the
following provisions stated below shall apply:
a. Where the Specification mentions only one such name, make, type, or style, the
Contractor shall employ such subcontractor, fabricator, or process and shall furnish
such make, type, or style so specified, regardless of any reference to the phrase "or
other approved" or other words to that effect, which may appear in the Specification.
b. Where the Specification mentions more than one name of subcontractor, fabricator,
or process, or more than one make, type, or style of article, material, or equipment
item, the final selection of the subcontractor, fabricator, or process to be employed, or
of the make, type, or style to be furnished, shall rest with the Owner.
E.
Surveys
1. The Owner will establish the lot lines and permanent bench mark. The Contractor shall
employ a competent surveyor, or other qualified person, who shall establish and maintain
all other lines and levels necessary to the location and construction of the work under the
Contract.
2. The Contractor shall protect and preserve all bench marks and monuments and shall
make no changes in locations without the written approval of the Owner. Any of them
which may be lost or destroyed by the Contractor's work or which require shifting because
of the work to be performed hereunder, shall, subject to prior approval by the Owner, be
accurately relocated by a registered survey and shall be replaced by the Contractor, all at
the Contractor's expense.
3. The Contractor shall carefully compare all lines and levels given on the Drawings with
existing lines and levels and shall call any discrepancies to the attention of the Owner's
Field Representative, in writing, for proper determination before proceeding with the Work.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the work and shall make good any
work performed in error.
F.
Tests
1. When required in writing by the Architect-Engineer or Owner, the Contractor shall make all
tests, in addition to those specifically called for elsewhere in the contract, as may be
necessary to determine whether the requirements of the contract have been fulfilled, and
shall, if so directed, engage in an approved testing laboratory for making same. The
Contractor shall provide all required materials, labor, apparatus, services and facilities in
connection therewith.
2. Should such additional tests show, in the judgment of the Architect-Engineer that the
requirements of the contract have been fulfilled, then the cost of same shall be paid for by
the Owner.
3. Should such additional tests show, in the judgment of the Architect-Engineer, the work or
materials to be defective or otherwise not meeting the requirements of the contract, the
Contractor shall, immediately upon notification by the Architect-Engineer, remove, replace,
or reconstruct same, as the case may require, and shall, if directed by the ArchitectEngineer, make such further tests as may be necessary to determine fulfillment of the
contract requirements, the costs of all such tests and retests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
4. All tests shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer, except that those
required by a public authority shall be under the direction of such authority.
G.
Temporary Facilities
1. Telephone.
a. Other contractors shall provide separate telephone service for their own use and shall
pay all costs in connection therewith.
2. Water.
00 7200 - 18
June 16, 2016
a.
3.
4.
The Contractor shall provide whatever water as may be required for his own use and
the use of his subcontractors and/or make necessary arrangements with the Owner
to provide for his own water at his own expense.
Light and Power.
a. The Electrical Contractor (electrical portion on All Trades Work) shall provide
temporary power from the existing building as directed and coordinated with the
Owner and General Contractor for temporary building power through the Project
duration.
Toilet.
a. The General Contractor shall provide suitable toilet facilities at locations approved by
the Owner's Field Representative for the use of the Contractor's employees and all
employees of other subcontractors, and shall maintain same in proper sanitary
condition. At completion, the facilities shall be removed and the premises left clean.
H.
Use of Premises and Moving of Materials
1. The Contractor, subcontractors, supplies, and their respective employees shall use only
such gates or entrances for access to the premises as may be designated by the Owner.
2. Before commencing the Work, the Contractor shall consult with the Owner's Field
Representative as to available space for temporary storage of materials, location of
temporary structures, machinery, equipment, and other property of the Contractor, and
place of access to the Work. Locations determined for such storage of materials,
temporary structures, apparatus, etc., shall be accepted by the Contractor as temporary,
and the Contractor shall, at own expense promptly move any part or all of same, at any
time or times, as directed by the Owner's Field Representative, to avoid interference with,
or undue inconvenience to, the work of other contractors and/or operations of the Owner.
3. The Contractor shall confine temporary structures, machinery, equipment, and other
property of the Contractor, the storage of materials, and the operations of workers to limits
indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or directions of the Owner or the Owner's Field
Representative, Temporary structure es shall be neat in appearance, shall not constitute a
fire hazard, and shall be properly maintained.
4. The Contractor shall not load, or permit to be loaded, any part of the work with a weight
that will damage any work or endanger the safety of the structure or any part thereof.
I.
Cleaning of Premises
1. The General Contractor, all contractors, and the Owner when performing any work with
their own forces, shall not allow to accumulate and shall each remove, at their own
expense, from the premises and the site, at least once each week, their surplus and scrap
material, bulk waste and debris, such empty crates, cartons, and containers, resulting
from their work, and the work of their employees and their subcontractors. All such
materials, waste and debris which are combustible shall be removed from building at the
end of each working day.
2. Without limiting the responsibility of each contractor and the Owner, as hereinbefore
provided, the General Contractor shall, at own expense:
a. Maintain the site, the premises and all of the work in an orderly and clean condition at
all times.
b. Keep all floors, roads, sidewalks, pavements and parking areas free, at all times,
from accumulation of dirt, rubbish and general refuse, water, snow, and ice.
3. All contractors, subcontractors, and the Owner, shall cooperate with the Contractor and
each shall use reasonable diligence and shall make every effort, in connection with their
work, to avoid excessive dirt, rubbish, and general refuse and to minimize the extent of
cleaning and removal thereof required hereunder of the Contractor.
4. Contractors shall keep their materials in proper storage arrangement at all times,
otherwise the Contractor, when cleaning the building interior or the premises as required
herein, may remove scattered material as rubbish or general refuse.
5. In the event any contractor (including the General Contractor) fails to comply with the
requirements herein, the Owner, after notice to the said contractor, shall have the right to
order the cleaning and/or removal done by others, and said contractor agrees to
00 7200 - 19
June 16, 2016
6.
7.
reimburse the Owner, in each such instance, for the cost incurred in the connection
therewith. No back charges or other charges shall be made by the General Contractor to
any contractor not under the jurisdiction of the Contractor or to the Owner for any cleaning
work under the required hereunder or otherwise, unless done pursuant to a prior written
order.
Without relieving the General Contractor and contractors not under the jurisdiction of the
Contractor from any of their respective obligations hereunder, they may if they so desire,
make their own arrangements for cooperative effort in keeping the premises clean and in
the removal of surplus and scrap material, bulk waste and debris as hereinbefore
required.
Each contractor shall remove from the premises and site their tools, scaffolding, surplus
materials and all temporary work and structures upon completion of the Work and shall
leave the Work and the premises clean and acceptable to the Owner.
1.12 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
A.
Contractor's Default
1. Should Contractor, at any time:
a. Become insolvent, or
b. If an individual becomes deceased or;
c. Fail to remedy imperfections in the work, or;
d. Fail in any respect to prosecute the work with promptness and diligence, or;
e. Fail in performance of any agreements contained in the contract, then the Owner
shall have the right, by written notice to Contractor, to terminate employment of
Contractor.
2. In case of such discontinuance of employment of Contractor, the unpaid balance of the
amount then due on the contract shall not be paid to Contractor, but shall be retained by
Owner and used by Owner to defray the expenses incurred by Owner for the completion
of work, including the cost of furnishing or obtaining workers, materials and services of
contractors to finish the work, and charges and costs resulting from such default, and to
indemnify Owner for any damage or loss suffered because of such default.
3. Owner shall keep an accurate account of all expenses of finishing the work, and charges
and costs incurred or resulting from such default.
4. Upon finishing of work, Contractor shall pay Owner an amount equal to the aggregate of
expenses of finishing the work, costs and charges resulting from such default, and the
loss and damage suffered by Owner because of such default, less the amount of the
unpaid balance of the contract, if such unpaid balance shall exceed the expenses of
finishing the work and the charges and costs resulting from such default, the excess shall
be retained by Owner on account of liquidated damages suffered by Owner because of
such default.
5. Remedies of Owner provided in this section are in addition to and not in lieu of any and all
remedies provided by law for breach of contract.
B.
Termination by the Owner
1. Owner may terminate the contract at any time by giving written notification to the
Contractor.
2. After receipt of notice of termination, Contractor shall terminate all work under the contract
on the date specified in such notice.
3. Contractor shall, if directed by Owner and to the extent stated in the notice of termination,
do such work as may be necessary to preserve work in progress and to protect material,
plant and equipment on the work or in transit thereto.
4. Upon termination of contract and compliance by Contractor, all in accordance with the
preceding paragraph, Owner shall pay the Contractor for all obligations under the contract.
5. Such portion of the work as Contractor and Contractor’s subcontractors shall have
completed, plus;
6. The cost to Contractor of materials which have been delivered to the site of Owner up to
the effective date of termination, plus;
00 7200 - 20
June 16, 2016
7.
The cost to Contractor of materials to be used in performance of the contract for which
have not been terminated and settled hereunder, provided that such materials are
delivered to Owner within a reasonable period after the effective date of termination, plus;
8. The cost to Contractor of terminating and settling orders and subcontracts in accordance
with this provision, and plus;
9. The cost to Contractor of complying with Owner’s directions relative to preservation of the
work in progress and protection of materials, plant and equipment on the work or in transit
thereto, Owner shall have a credit against the aggregate of items a) through e) for
amounts theretofore paid for by Owner to or for the account of Contractor pursuant to
other provisions of the contract.
10. Payment to be made for any such completed portion of the work shall be in the proportion
that the completed portion of the work bears to the entire work provided for in the contract.
11. Owner shall be under no obligation to pay Contractor for anticipated profit on any portion
of work not completed.
12. Owner shall be under no obligation to compensate Contractor under provisions of this
section if the contract is terminated because of default or breach of contract by Contractor,
under the section entitled “Contractor’s Default”.
C.
Suspension of Operations
1. Contractor shall upon receipt of Owner’s written notice and within the time stated therein,
suspend shipment and delivery of material and stop any part or all of the work and
operations hereunder for such period or periods of time as Owner may deem advisable
and designate in said notice.
2. Upon receipt of such notice, Contractor shall immediately confer with Owner relative to the
probable duration of such suspension and stoppage, delays and extensions of time
resulting therefrom, the reduction and possible elimination of Contractor’s field costs, and
with respect to such other prospective costs and expense as may result directly from such
work stoppage.
3. Upon further written notice from Owner, Contractor shall promptly resume all or any part of
the work and operations including securing of materials required by said resumption
notice.
4. Reimbursement to Contractor shall be limited to actual net costs and expenses (without
other overhead or profit) for such items as shall have been agreed upon between Owner
and Contractor, and Contractor shall have no further claim against Owner for damage or
loss resulting from such suspension of operations.
5. Such costs and expenses shall be subject to audit by Owner.
END OF SECTION
00 7200 - 21
June 16, 2016
SECTION 00 7300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
A.
The Specification and Drawings are intended to describe the work and to furnish sufficient
information to indicate what is necessary for the construction of the work, complete in all
details.
B.
The Specifications and Drawings are intended to be complementary, and what is called for by
either shall be as binding upon Contractor as if called for by both.
C.
The work shall be complete in every detail, however, should any work or any material be
required which is not denoted in the specification or on the drawings either directly or indirectly,
but which is nevertheless necessary for proper carrying out of intent thereof, including
variations as may be necessary to conform to conditions of actual construction, Contractor
agrees the same to be implied and required and shall perform all work and furnish all such
material as fully as if they were particularly delineated or described without additional cost to
Owner.
D.
Contractor shall not take advantage of any manifestly unintentional error, omission, or
inconsistency, should such exist.
E.
Should any such error, omission, or inconsistency appear in the Specifications or in Drawings,
Contractor, before proceeding with work, shall bring Architect-Engineer’s attention to same for
proper determination, and in no case shall Contractor proceed with the work in uncertainty.
F.
In case of such error, omission or inconsistency, unless there is sufficient evidence reasonably
to establish otherwise, the provisions of the agreement will take precedence over the
specification and provisions of the specification will take precedence over the drawings, in case
of inconsistencies between scales and figures, the figured dimensions on drawings will govern,
and large-scale details will take precedence over small-scale details; in each instance, only to
the extent necessary to resolve such error, omission or inconsistency.
G.
Large-scale or full-size details, when furnished by Architect-Engineer to Contractor after award
of contract, will be developed from the scale drawings.
H.
Should such details differ from the intent of scale drawings or not be reasonably inferable
therefrom and such difference result in additional expense to Contractor, Contractor shall,
immediately upon receipt of such details, call Architect-Engineer’s attention to the same, in
writing, for proper determination.
I.
No adjustment in contract price in respect thereof will be made to Contractor unless Contractor
receives a written order with respect thereto from Architect-Engineer before starting the work
covered by said detail.
J.
With respect to any parts of work for which only a portion is completely drawn or detailed or
which are indicated on drawings for any particular area or location, all like work shall conform to
the portions so drawn or detailed and shall be deemed to continue throughout like areas or
locations and shall include only such variations therefrom approved by Architect-Engineer as
required to conform to conditions of actual construction, unless distinctly shown or noted
otherwise.
K.
While work described in the specification may be divided into sections, headings, and
subheadings, Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to provide a complete
piece of work as contemplated by the Specifications and Drawings.
L.
Any item called for under any one Specification subdivision must be supplied even though it is
not called for again under the subdivision for the particular work.
M. Regardless of such subdivision by sections, headings, and subheadings as they appear in the
Specifications, Contractor shall be responsible for classification and allocation of the
performance of work and of furnishing of all labor and material.
00 7300 - 1
June 16, 2016
1.02 ARCHITECT-ENGINEER'S STATUS
A.
The Contractor will assist the Owner in the general administration of the Contract, acting in any
and all of the various capacities assigned to the Architect-Engineer in the Contract. The
Architect-Engineer and the Architect-Engineer's representatives shall have access to the work
at all times. The Architect-Engineer shall have the right to reject or condemn all materials
furnished and/or installed and/or work performed which, in the Architect-Engineer's judgment,
do not meet the requirements of the Contract.
B.
The administration, inspection, assistance, and actions by the Architect-Engineer or the
Owner's representative, as hereinbefore provided, shall not be construed as undertaking
supervisory control of the construction work or of means and methods employed by the
Contractor and shall not relieve the Owner or the Contractor from any of their responsibilities or
obligations under the Contract, nor shall the Owner or the Contractor request or require the
Architect-Engineer or the Owner's representative to undertake such supervisory control or to
administrate, to supervise, to inspect, to assist, or to act in any manner so as to relieve the
Owner or the Contractor from such responsibilities or obligations.
C.
The fact that the Architect-Engineer or the Owner's representative has not made early
discovery of faulty work or of work performed at variance with the Contract requirements or of
work omitted or that the Owner's representative has permitted faulty work to be done or has
permitted work to be done which is at variance with the Contract requirements or has permitted
omissions in the work shall not bar the Architect-Engineer or Owner's representative from
subsequently rejecting or condemning such faulty work or work done which is at variance with
the Contract requirements nor the Owner from insisting that the Contractor correct such work
and complete work omitted. Regardless of when such discovery, rejection and/or condemnation
may be made and regardless of when the Contractor may be ordered to correct and/or
complete such work, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for an increase in
the Contract price, nor shall the Contractor subcontractors or any persons directly or indirectly
engaged or employed by any of them have any claim against the Architect-Engineer or Owner
for payment or allowance of any kind on account of increased cost, damage, or loss which may
be incurred by reason thereof or for correcting faulty work or work which is at variance with the
Contract requirements and/or in completing work omitted.
D.
The Contractor shall secure, protect, defend, hold harmless, and indemnify the Owner and the
Architect-Engineer and any of their respective agents, servants, and employees from all claims
and liability whatsoever resulting from bodily injury, sickness, or disease (including death
resulting at any time therefrom) of any person or persons arising out of the Contract and for
damage, loss, destruction of any property, or expense which may arise on account of or as the
result of faulty work, or work performed which is at variance with the Contract requirements or
work omitted, regardless of whether such damage, loss or expense has occurred prior to,
during or subsequent to the discovery, rejection and/or condemnation of faulty work, or of work
which is at variance with the Contract requirements or of work omitted.
E.
Whenever in these General Conditions the Contractor has agreed or undertaken to hold
harmless the Architect-Engineer from liability and/or loss, damage, and expense, or it is
provided that the Contractor shall have no claim against the Architect-Engineer, it is intended
that the Architect-Engineer shall have the rights of a third party beneficiary and shall be entitled
to the benefit of said undertakings, agreements and provisions, notwithstanding that the
Architect-Engineer is not a signatory to the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor
and has not furnished a consideration to the Contractor.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION - CLAIMS
A.
The prime Contractor shall keep at the work site, during progress of the work, a competent
superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Architect-Engineer. The
superintendent shall represent the prime Contractor on the site of the work and all directions
given to that person shall be as binding as if given to the prime Contractor. On request, all such
directions shall be confirmed in writing to the prime Contractor.
00 7300 - 2
June 16, 2016
B.
If the prime Contractor shall contend that such directions will result in an increase in the cost of
the work, damage, or loss, and that the prime Contractor is entitled to payment by the Owner by
reason thereof, the prime Contractor shall, within 48 hours of the receipt of such directions,
except in an emergency endangering life and property, notify the Architect-Engineer and
Owner, in writing, of any contentions, the amount of such claim with respect thereto, and all
details in connection therewith, and shall not proceed upon such directions or with the work
affected thereby until receiving, in writing, acknowledgment of the claim by, and instructions
from, the Architect-Engineer or Owner. The prime Contractor shall comply with such
instructions, and unless said claim is finally disposed of by said acknowledgment and
instructions, said compliance shall be without prejudice to the rights of the Contractor and
Owner. In the event of an emergency endangering life or property, the Contractor shall proceed
with that work necessary to protect life and property and shall keep accurate and complete
records of the costs of such work, which records shall be presented to the Architect-Engineer
as soon as the emergency ceases to exist.
C.
If the prime Contractor shall contend that payment is due from the Owner for increase in the
cost of the work, damage or loss, because of any action or omission of others during the
performance of the work, the Contractor shall not delay the work on account thereof and shall,
within 7 days after the first observance of such occurrence, notify the Architect-Engineer and
Owner, in writing, of any contentions, the amount of the claim with respect thereto, and all
details in connection therewith.
1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A.
The prime Contractor and its subcontractor's shall be responsible for the work and every part
thereof, for the methods, means, and equipment used in performing the Contract, and for all
materials, tools, apparatus, and property of every description used in connection therewith.
B.
Except as otherwise provided the prime Contractor assumes all risks, hazards, and conditions
in connection with the performance of the Contract including, but without being limited thereto,
weather, delays in delivery of material or equipment, embargoes, strikes and/or labor
disturbances directed against the prime Contractor or subcontractors.
1.05 INDEMNIFICATION
A.
The Contractor shall secure, protect, defend, hold harmless, and indemnify the Owner and the
Architect-Engineer and any of their respective agents, servants, and employees from all claims
and liability whatsoever resulting from bodily injury, sickness, or disease (including death
resulting at any time therefrom) of any person or persons arising out of the Contract and for
damage, loss, destruction of any property, or expense which may arise on account of or as the
result of faulty work, or work performed which is at variance with the Contract requirements or
work omitted, regardless of whether such damage, loss or expense has occurred prior to,
during or subsequent to the discovery, rejection and/or condemnation of faulty work, or of work
which is at variance with Contract requirements or of work omitted.
B.
Whenever in these General Conditions, the Contractor has agreed or undertaken to hold
harmless the Architect-Engineer from liability and/or loss, damage and expense, or it is
provided that the Contractor shall have no claim against the Contractor, it is intended that the
Architect-Engineer shall have the rights of a third party beneficiary and shall be entitled to the
benefit of said undertakings, agreements, provisions, notwithstanding that the ArchitectEngineer is not a signatory to the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor and has not
furnished a consideration to the Contractor.
C.
Where the Contract, including amendments thereto, provides for decisions, determinations,
orders, certifications, directions, or other actions by the Architect-Engineer and or the ArchitectEngineer's representative, the same shall be final and binding upon the Contractor and the
Owner.
00 7300 - 3
June 16, 2016
1.06 LIENS
A.
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable lien laws of the state in which the Work is being
performed. As a condition of any payments whatsoever by the Owner on account of the
Contract, or on account of any orders for additions or revisions thereto, the Contractor shall,
upon request of the Owner, procure from each and every subcontractor and supplier of material
or labor, a waiver of lien or a release of any claim to a lien which they or any of them may have
under the lien laws of the state in which the Work is being done, and shall furnish the same to
the Owner together with each and every other document, sworn statement or assurance which,
in the opinion of the Owner, is necessary or appropriate to establish that the property is free
from liens on account of anything which is done by the Contractor, or those acting under the
Contractor or subcontractors, in the performance of the Work under the Contract and any and
all orders for additions and revisions thereto. Any payments made by the Owner without
requiring strict compliance with the terms of this paragraph shall not be construed as a waiver
by the Owner of the right to insist upon strict compliance with the terms of this paragraph as a
condition of later payments.
B.
Same has been asserted, of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with the
performance or default in performance of the contract, and if the Owner or representatives of
the Owner or any property of either or any property installed on the premises, might be or
become liable for the discharge or satisfaction of such lien or claim, then the Owner shall have
the right to retain out of any payment then due or thereafter to become due, in addition to the
amounts otherwise retained under the Contract, an amount sufficient to discharge such lien or
satisfy such claim and to reimburse the Owner and/or the representatives of the Owner for all
costs and expenses in connection therewith, including cost of bonds and reasonable attorneys'
fees, and shall notify the Contractor of such retention. The Owner, with sole discretion, shall
have the right to apply any amounts retained to discharge or satisfy such lien or claim and pay
all costs and expenses in connection therewith unless, within 20 days after said notice,
1. The Contractor has said lien or claim discharged or satisfied, or
2. Some other procedure, proposed by the Contractor and satisfactory to the Owner, is
adopted to effect, within a reasonable period of time, the discharge or satisfaction of said
lien or claim.
C.
If the amounts retained are insufficient for the aforesaid purpose, or if any such lien or claim
remains undischarged or unsatisfied after all payments have been made to the Contractor, then
the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all sums in excess of the retained amounts, if any,
or for the amounts that the Owner paid to discharge such lien or satisfy such claims, including
the costs and expenses and reasonable attorneys' fees in connection therewith.
D.
The Contractor shall include a provision satisfying the requirements hereinbefore specified as
part of any and all subcontracts entered into for the Work or any portion thereof.
1.07 MEASUREMENT AND FITTING OF PARTS
A.
The Contractor shall take all necessary field measurements and otherwise verify all dimensions
shown on the Drawings, including the Contractor's, subcontractors' and manufacturers' Shop
Drawings. Should any error or inconsistency exist, the Contractor shall not proceed with the
Work affected thereby until reporting same to the Architect-Engineer and shall have received
from the Architect-Engineer clarification or correction.
B.
The Contractor shall, without extra charge, make adjustable parts fit to fixed parts. The
Contractor shall coordinate all portions of the Work under the Contract prior to fabrication
and/or installation and shall do all required cutting and altering of and fitting to, any portion of
the Work to make its several parts fit together and to make possible installation of adjoining
portions of the Work and to fit Work already in place.
C.
The Contractor shall not cut or alter the Work of any other Contractor without permission of said
other Contractor and concurrence therein by the Owner's Field Representative.
END OF SECTION
00 7300 - 4
June 16, 2016
Specifications
SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Contractor Use of Premises.
B. Owner Occupancy.
C. Sequence of Work.
1.02
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of premises for work and construction operations to area indicated on
drawings. Owner will occupy the present building during construction.
B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner.
1.03
OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner will occupy the site upon Substantial Completion. Contractor shall use all
means to protect existing objects to remain, as well as to cooperate with Owner to
minimize disruption of normal activities.
B. Schedule the work to accommodate Owner occupancy
C. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or public ways without permit.
1.04
SUMMARY OF THE CONSTRUCTION
A. Site demolition, grading, and paving for a new parking lot for 358 parking spaces
plus 8 H.C. spaces.
B. The work of this project includes metal fencing and gates, as well as new ornamental
lighting.
C. Landscape is also included in this work.
1.05
SEQUENCING OF WORK
A. Contractor shall coordinate the sequencing of work to minimize the disruption of
normal activities at the Birmingham Arena nearby.
B. Proceed with the final site clean-up upon completion of the work
END OF SECTION
01 1000 - 1
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 2000
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Allowances
B. Schedule of Values.
C. Application for Payment.
D. Change Procedures.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 2300 - Alternates.
B. Section 01 3000 – Administration Requirements.
C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements -substitutions.
1.03
CASH ALLOWANCES
A. Cost included in Allowances: Cost of product to contractor or subcontractor, less
applicable trade discounts.
B. Funds will be drawn from Cash Allowance only by Change Order.
C. Cash Allowances: None
1.04
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit typed Schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment
Continuation Sheet. Contractor's Standard Form or computer printout will be
considered
B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 13 days after date of Owner Contractor Agreement.
C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item
with number and title of the major specification Section.
D. Include within each line item, the amount of Unit Cost Allowances, identify quantities
taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve total for the
item.
E. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead
and profit.
F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.
1.05
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and
Certificate for Payment.
B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for
Payment.
C. Payment Period: Monthly
1.05
CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to
01 2000 - 1
June 16, 2016
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 2007 Edition, Paragraph
7.4 by using supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710.
The Architect may issue a Proposal Request Change, which includes a detailed
description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and
Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation
of any overtime work required. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within
five (5) days.
The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the
Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a
statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum
and Contract Time with full documentation. Document any requested substitutions in
accordance with Section 01600.
Stipulated Sum Change Order: Based on Proposal Request & Contractor's
maximum price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by
Architect.
Unit Price Change Order: For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change
Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. Changes in Contract Sum or
Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form G714
Construction Change Authorization signed by Owner, instructing the Contractor to
proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining
any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Promptly execute change.
Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after
completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the
Contract.
Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full
information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs
for changes in the Work
Change Order Forms: AIA Form G701-2001 - Change Order.
Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of
parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
END OF SECTION
01 2000 - 2
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 2200
UNIT PRICES
PART 1.- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Construction Drawings, Technical Specifications, Addenda, and general provisions of
the Contract, including Contract General Conditions and Supplementary General
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 2000 – Price & Payment
B. Section 01 4000 – Quality Control
1.04
DEFINITIONS
1.05
A.
Unit Price: An amount proposed by Bidder and stated on the Bid Proposal as a price
per unit of measurement for materials or services that will be added to or deducted
from the Contract Sum by Change Order in the event the estimated quantities of Work
required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.
Unit prices quoted in the Bid Proposal are for additions or deletions of approved items
of Work.
2.
All unit prices quoted shall be for the items completely installed, furnished, and
operable in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall include profit,
overhead, taxes, cost of coordinating the unit price work with adjacent work,
compensation for risk of loss or damage to the work regardless of cause, all expenses
due to delays in performance, so they are the complete price to the University.
3.
Unit prices shall not apply to work the Contractor elects to do for its own convenience
or to correct errors committed by the Contractor.
4.
All unit prices shall remain in effect for the full term of the Contract.
5.
Quantities listed in the Contract Documents are approximate only. Contract Amount
shall be adjusted by change order using unit prices listed for actual quantities of Work
performed.
PROCEDURES
A.
Measurement and Payment Procedures: As stated in General Conditions of the
Contract. Refer to individual product Specification Sections for Work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Basis of each unit price is specified in those Sections.
01 2200 - 1
June 16, 2016
B.
Measure: The Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-inplace that involves use of established unit prices and to have this Work measured, at
Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor.
B.
List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section.
Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials
described under each unit price.
C.
The Owner is not obligated to use the unit prices.
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable to this Section.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
3.01
LIST OF UNIT PRICES
A.
Unit Price No. 1: Undercut
Site Undercut includes removal of soft, deleterious, or otherwise unsuitable soils below
subgrade elevations under paved areas, but excluding removal of footings, slabs,
existing storm drainage, proposed storm drainage trenching, and other areas that require
removal on the plans. The unit price includes removal, haul off, disposal of materials,
and replacement with compacted engineered fill. The establishment of need for
undercut and the measurement of undercut must be performed by the Owner's
Geotechnical representative.
Unit of measure - Cubic Yard (CY)
Include 1,000 CY in Base Bid.
B. Unit Price No. 2 - Asphalt Milling and Overlay
1.25" Milling and Asphalt overlay of the surrounding City Streets includes traffic control,
milling, disposal of materials, and replacement of the top 1.25" with a new asphalt
section 424 wearing surface, 1/2" Max Aggregate Size, but not include pavement
required to be replaced associated with other shown . The establishment of need for the
milling shall come from the Architect. The area for payment of Milling and Overlay shall
be as measured in-place.
Unit of measure - Square Yard (SY)
Include 350 SY in Base Bid.
C.
Unit Price No. 3 – Removal of Existing Fence on VFW Property
This items includes removal of the existing fence on the VFW property, disposal of
materials, and the repair of the ground surface or paving with like materials (i.e. asphalt,
concrete, grass, landscaping, etc.) The need for the fence removal shall come from the
Architect.
Unit of measure – Linear Feet (LF)
Include 550 SY in Base Bid.
END OF SECTION 01 2200
01 2200 - 2
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 2300
ALTERNATES
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification and description of Alternate Work.
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Bid Documents: Quotation of cost of each Alternate.
B. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into
work.
C. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate.
1.03
PROCEDURES
A Alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the
Work, including changes under each Alternate, when acceptance is designated in
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
1.04
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
ALTERNATE No. 1: LED Lighting in lieu of Metal Halide Fixtures
As specified in Electrical Sheet E2.2
END OF SECTION
01 2300 - 1
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 3300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal Procedures.
B. Construction Progress Schedules.
C. Proposed Products List.
D. Shop Drawings.
E. Product Data.
F. Samples.
G. Manufacturer's Instructions.
H. Manufacturer's Certificates.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment: Application for Payment.
B. Section 01 7000 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty and manufacturer's
certificates closeout submittals.
1.03
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with Architect accepted form.
B. Identify Project, Location, Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier; pertinent Drawing
sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.
C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of
information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract
Documents.
D. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect office.
Coordinate submission of related items.
E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which
may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
F. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
G. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous
submittal.
H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
1.04
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date of OwnerContractor Agreement for Architects review.
C. Revise and resubmit as required.
D. Submit revised schedules with each Application for
Payment, identifying changes since previous version.
E. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item
of Work at each submission.
F. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and
01 3300 - 1
June 16, 2016
product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.
1.05
PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement submit complete list of
major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model
number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name,
model or catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.06
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two
copies which will be retained by Architect.
B. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures and for Record
Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.07
PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which
will be retained by the Architect.
B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information unique to this
Project.
C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide
copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.08
SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristic of the Product,
with integral parts and attachment devices.
B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturer's standard colors,
textures, and patterns for Architect selection.
C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification
Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect.
E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated
in individual specification Sections.
1.09
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing, in
quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.
1.10
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate
to Architect for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Architect.
END OF SECTION
01 3300 - 2
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, water, and sanitary
facilities.
B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, fencing, protection of Work and water
control.
C. Construction Facilities: Progress cleaning
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning.
1.03
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source.
B. Provide temporary electric feeder as indicated on electrical drawings. Power
consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service.
C. Provide separate metering and reimburse Owner for cost of energy used.
D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution
boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required.
E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent and ground fault protection at
convenient location.
1.04
TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations.
B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq. ft. lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after
dark for security purposes.
C. Provide and maintain .25 watt/sq. ft. H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for
security purposes.
D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting
conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
1.05
TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified
conditions for construction operations.
B. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with paragraph 1.11
Exterior Enclosures in this Section.
C. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F in areas where
construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
1.06
TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to
prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with
01 5000 - 1
June 16, 2016
temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.
1.07
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations.
B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water.
C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with
threaded connections.
1.08
SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facility and enclosures. Existing facilities shall not be
used.
1.09
BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers, as required to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to
allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties
from damage from construction and demolition operations.
B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.
C. Provide protection for plant life designed to remain which might be damaged by work
of this Contract. Replace damaged plant life.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, and site structures from
damage.
1.10
FENCING
A. Construction: Chain link
B. Provide 6’-0” high fence around construction site
C.Protect buildings from weather damage during demolition and construction operations.
1.11
WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and
maintain pumping equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to
protect site from soil erosion.
C. Existing chain link fence may be used as part of the construction fence.
1.12
PARKING
A. Limit all construction personnel parking of Street. Coordinate with Architect and
Owner
1.13
WATER CONTROL
A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate
acceptable working conditions and to protection for Products, to allow for temporary
heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual
specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access
doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.14
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification Sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection as required for installed products.
Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage.
C. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
01 5000 - 2
June 16, 2016
1.15
SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect work and existing facilities from unauthorized
entry, vandalism, or theft.
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.
1.16
PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean
and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attic, crawl spaces, and
other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose offsite.
END OF SECTION
01 5000 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Transportation and Handling.
C. Storage and Protection.
D. Product Options.
E. Substitutions.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.
1.03
PRODUCTS
A. Products: Mean new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and
systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for
preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also
include existing materials or components required for reuse.
B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar
components.
1.04
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements,
quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.05
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals
and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate
controlled enclosures.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place product on sloped supports, above
ground.
C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.
D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
E.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surface in a well-drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
01 6000 - 1
June 16, 2016
G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.06
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified By Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product
meeting those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions
allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for
Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
D. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No options, no substitutions
allowed.
1.07
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Architect will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date of
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no
fault of the Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
Substitution with Contract Documents.
D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds
the quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified
product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently
become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner for review or design services associated with reapproval by authorities.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop
drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when
acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each
request to one proposed Substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the
proposed product equivalence.
3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject
request.
END OF SECTION
01 6000 - 2
June 16, 2016
SECTION 01 7000
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout Procedures.
B. Final Cleaning.
C. Project Record Documents.
D. Maintenance Data.
E. Warranties.
F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning.
1.03
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has
been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with contract Documents
and ready for Architects inspection.
B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,
previous payments, and sum remaining due.
1.04
FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
C. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
D. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
site.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to
the project as the work progresses:
1. Contract Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual
products installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
01 7000 - 1
June 16, 2016
E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:
1. Field changes of dimension and detail.
2. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment.
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8 1/2" x 11" text pages, three D
side ring binders with durable plastic covers.
B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", and
title of project.
C. Maintenance instructions, subdivided by specification section. For each category,
identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and Suppliers.
Identify the following:
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment, if applicable.
3. Maintenance instructions for finishes, if any, including recommended cleaning
methods, materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
D. Project Documents and Certificates, including the following:
1. Shop Drawings and Product Data.
2. Certificates.
3. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
E. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.
This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect's comments. Revise
content of documents as required prior to final submittal.
F. Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection.
1.07
WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable
plastic cover.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated
submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
END OF SECTION
01 7000 - 2
June 16, 2016
SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE ` (SHORT FORM)`
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3500 - Concrete Finishing.
B.
Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; 2010 (Errata 2012).
B.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; 2011.
C.
ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.
D.
ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
E.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
F.
ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.
G.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
H.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
I.
ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
J.
ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
K.
ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3300 – FOR Submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop drawings.
a. Steel reinforcement.
2. Design Data.
a. Concrete mixture design.
C.
For Information.
1. Product Data.
a. Cement.
b. Admixtures.
2. Design / Performance Data.
a. Materials used in concrete.
3. Test Reports.
a. Materials used in concrete.
b. Strength test.
c. Laboratory reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Admixtures.
1. Air-entraining, in accordance with ASTM C260 to produce concrete air content, 6 percent,
plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing.
2. Water reducing admixtures.
03 3000 - 1
June 16, 2016
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Admixtures; Low-Range Water Reducing (LRWR), Mid-Range Water Reducing
(MRWR), or High-Range Water Reducing (superplasticizer) (HRWR).
In accordance with ASTM C494, Type A or F.
Use to increase workability (slump) where required for concrete placement.
Slump of concrete: Not more than listed for mix prior to addition of admixture, or 6
inches following addition of admixture.
Other admixtures, including fly ash, require written acceptance by Architect-Engineer.
B.
Aggregate, Fine and Coarse.
1. Clean and well graded.
2. In accordance with ASTM C33.
3. Coarse aggregate: Size 57, Class 5S.
4. Not containing materials that are deleteriously reactive with alkalis in cement.
C.
Grout.
1. Euclid Chemical Company; NS Grout: www.euclidchemical.com.
2. Five Star Products, Inc.; Five Star Grout: www.fivestarproducts.com.
3. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Duragrout: www.lmcc.com.
4. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; CG-86 Grout: www.wrmeadows.com.
D.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or Type II.
E.
Reinforcement: Deformed bars.
1. Material: Billet steel in accordance with ASTM A615 or rail steel in accordance with ASTM
A996.
2. Yield Strength of Reinforcement: Not less than 60,000 psi.
3. Detailing: In accordance with ACI SP-66.
F.
Water: In accordance with ASTM C1602.
G.
Welded Wire Reinforcement.
1. In accordance with ASTM A185.
2. Yield Strength: Not less than 65,000 psi.
3. In flat sheets, with proper support against displacement.
2.02 CONCRETE MIXES
A.
In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B.
Mix Requirements.
1. For paving, curbs, and sidewalks (Type PB).
a. Ultimate compressive strength at 28 Days: Not less than 4500 psi.
b. Cementitious content: Not less than 560 pounds per cubic yard.
c. Water/cementitious ratio: Not more than 0.44.
d. Slump: Not more than 3 inches.
e. Modulus of rupture at 28 days: Not less than 575 pounds per square inch.
2. For concrete not otherwise indicated (Type B).
a. Ultimate compressive strength at 28 days: Not less than 3000 psi.
b. Cementitious content: Not less than 520 pounds per cubic yard.
c. Water/cementitious ratio: Not more than 0.51.
d. Slump: Not more than 4 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Soil Preparation.
1. Footings are designed to bear on firm soil with allowable bearing pressure of __________
psf.
2. Obtain concurrence of Owner's Field Representative of exposed soil quality before placing
concrete for footings.
3. Granular slab fill.
03 3000 - 2
June 16, 2016
a.
Dense-grade aggregate.
B.
Formwork.
1. Construct of smooth surface form material, true, rigid, leakproof.
2. Brace externally and diagonally and sufficiently strong to support dead weight of forms
and liquid weight of concrete without displacement.
C.
Reinforcement.
1. In accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318.
2. Maintain position during concrete placement.
D.
Placement of Concrete.
1. Temperature of Concrete at Placement: Not less than 55 degrees F, and not more than 90
degrees F.
2. Atmospheric Temperature at Placement: Not less than 40 degrees F.
3. Temperature of Concrete for seven Days of Curing: Not less than 50 degrees F.
4. Protect from injurious wind, sun, and temperature.
5. Water cure for seven days.
END OF SECTION
03 3000 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated steel items.
A.
Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
A.
AGA - MA-3A, Recommended Details for Hot-dip Galvanized Structures; 2002.
B.
AISC (COMM) - Commentary on the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable
Stress Design and Plastic Design; 1999.
C.
AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2005.
D.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
E.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
F.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2013.
G.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2014.
H.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2014.
I.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2012.
J.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2015.
K.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; Society for Protective
Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3300 - for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,
size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and
details where applicable.
a. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
b. Metal (miscellaneous iron) fabrications.
C.
For Information.
1. Product Data.
2. Certificates.
a. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project,
verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Unless otherwise specified or superseded by local building or state codes, detail, fabricate, and
erect metal fabrications in accordance with AISC Specification, Code, and Detailing Manual.
B.
Qualifications.
1. Design Professional (Specialty Structural Engineer).
05 5000 - 1
June 16, 2016
a.
b.
c.
Accepts responsibility for design of equipment support channels.
Experienced in providing design services of kind indicated.
Legally qualified (licensed) to practice structural engineering in the State in which the
Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Lightest standard section rolled for each shape to fabricate components, unless details
designate weight, then use that weight.
B.
Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.
C.
Plates: ASTM A 283.
D.
Sheet.
1. Cold Rolled Steel: ASTM A1008.
E.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized
components.
F.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
G.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
H.
Zinc Paint for Touch Up of Zinc Coatings.
1. Zinc Clad 5; Sherwin-Williams.
2. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Members without twists, bends, open joints, misalignment, ragged edges.
B.
Miters and joints accurately cut and fit.
C.
Members true to length for assembly without fillers.
D.
Exposed surfaces free of mill scale, rust, pits, craters, burrs, and other irregularities.
E.
Completed assembly strong, rigid, and neat in appearance.
F.
Bevel splice plates at change in width of adjacent members.
G.
Fabrication and erection tolerances associated with structural steel are considered excessive
and will not be accepted.
H.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
I.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
J.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
K.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
L.
Shop Connections.
1. Welded, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2. In accordance with following criteria.
3. Welding.
a. Steel in accordance with AWS D1.1.
b. Shop weld by shielded metal arc, gas metal arc with carbon dioxide shielding,
submerged arc welding, flux cored arc welding process.
c. Use shielded arc electrodes not over 3/16 inch diameter.
d. Use properly qualified operators skilled in making strong, neat welds with this
electrode.
05 5000 - 2
June 16, 2016
e.
Join parts in as close contact as possible with size of weld increased by amount of
separation if separation exceeds 1/16 inch.
f.
Remove loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, other foreign material to expose clean
steel surfaces for welding.
g. Weld shall be sufficient size and length to develop required stresses with minimum
size of weld to transmit stresses of 3/16 inch.
h. Continuous and watertight at exterior members.
i.
Grind smooth with surfaces of members where exposed.
j.
If welding is not applicable, use bolts.
k. Where design calls for welding of two elements of different thickness and where
these thicknesses are incompatible for proper welding, properly connect angles or
plates of proper thickness ratio.
l.
Use necessary jigs and clamps to prevent distortion during welding.
m. Employ procedures to prevent undercutting, insufficient throat or leg, lack of fusion,
spattering.
n. Bring parts to be fillet welded in as close contact as practicable.
o. Size of fillet weld shall be such that stresses in adjacent base material do not exceed
allowable value for this material.
2.03 FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Steel Designated Zinc Coated (Galvanized).
1. Fabricate in accordance with Class I guidelines in accordance with AGA MA-11.
2. For iron and steel products, in accordance with paragraph 5.1 of ASTM A123.
3. For iron and steel hardware, in accordance with table 1 of ASTM A153.
4. Apply hot-dip zinc coating to rolled components in accordance with ASTM A123.
5. Apply hot-dip zinc coating to sheet components in accordance with ASTM A653.
6. Finish: Continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and free from
defects detrimental to use.
7. Repair uncoated areas prior to shipment in accordance with paragraph 4.5 of ASTM A153.
8. Repair areas damaged by welding, cutting, handling, and erection in accordance with
ASTM A780.
2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Take measurements at site and not from scale drawings.
B.
Inspect site and become familiar with conditions before starting installation.
C.
Make careful study of drawings and become familiar with work constructed by other before and
during erection of this work.
D.
Make allowances in method of erection and distribution of materials before and during erection
for obstructions which may be encountered resulting from work of others.
E.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
05 5000 - 3
June 16, 2016
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Join components together with tight, even joints for good appearance.
C.
Anchor and secure components if not listed under heading, Products Furnished But Not
Installed Under This Section.
D.
Furnish and install lugs, connections, bearing plates, anchors, and bolts required for erection.
E.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
F.
Drill Holes for Connecting Components.
G.
Field weld components unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
H.
Perform Field Welding in Accordance With AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
I.
Anchorage of Components to Concrete.
1. Use embedded anchors.
2. Use expansive anchors.
J.
Powder-actuated anchors will not be approved.
K.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
L.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not galvanized, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with method specified under heading, Finishes - Steel.
2. Zinc coating repair.
a. Paint fasteners and damaged surfaces with one coat of zinc paint.
b. Paint damaged zinc coated surfaces and fasteners with Sherwin-Williams Zinc Clad 5
or Tnemec 93-Zinc.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
05 5000 - 4
June 16, 2016
SECTION 05 5213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Gates.
1. Square
B.
Freestanding Railings at Steps.
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A.
Furnish following materials and deliver for installation in Section indicated.
1. Sleeves – Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Sockets for installation in concrete – Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
A.
ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B.
C.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
D.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2015.
E.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
F.
ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.
G.
ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2013.
H.
ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
I.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
J.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility
Guidelines).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 3300 - for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Mechanical connections.
b. Nylon railing system components.
c. Wall brackets and connectors.
d. Flange connections.
2. Certificates.
June 16, 2016
05 5213 - 1
a.
OSHA Standards.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Refer to Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements, for transportation, handling, storage and
protection requirements.
B.
Handle components to protect finished surfaces.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to Section 01 7000 – Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Handrails and Railings.
1. KaneSterling: www.sterlingdula.com.
2. The Wagner Companies: www.wagnercompanies.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with most stringent requirements of
ASTM E985 and applicable local code.
B.
Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed
force of 50 pounds per linear foot applied to top of assembly and in any direction, without
damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.
C.
Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist concentrated
force of 200 pounds applied at any point on top of assembly and in any direction, without
damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.
D.
Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to
connections or members.
E.
Design handrails and guardrails in accordance with ADAAG.
F.
Stairs that continue downward below level of exit discharge.
1. Design and construct barrier gates to prevent accidental travel below exit discharge level.
2. Size and swing of barrier gates: In compliance with governing building code egress
requirements.
G.
Dimensions: Refer to drawings for configurations and heights.
1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: Nominal 1-1/2 inches inside diameter, round.
2. Intermediate Rails: Nominal 1-1/2 inches inside diameter, round.
3. Posts: Nominal 1-1/2 inches inside diameter, round.
H.
Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same
materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting anchors.
I.
Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts
and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges,
escutcheons, and wall brackets.
2.03 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM
A.
Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
B.
Steel Pipe for Posts, Railings, Handrails, and Similar Components:: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B
Schedule 80 Type E or F, black finish.
1. With longitudinal seam installed on underside.
2. For posts: Extra strong weight, 0.200 inch wall thickness.
3. For railings, handrails, and similar components: Standard weight, 0.145 inch wall
thickness.
05 5213 - 2
June 16, 2016
C.
Angles, Bars, Rods, and Similar Shapes for Steel Handrails and Railings: ASTM A36.
1. Use lightest standard section rolled for each shape to fabricate components, unless
Drawing details designate weights or dimensions.
D.
Smooth and free of scale.
E.
Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously
welded; joints and seams ground smooth.
F.
Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
1. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Continuous with smooth, uniform surface on top and sides for entire length, without sharp
corners, projections, or irregularities.
B.
Railing standards: Single one piece lengths spaced not over 5 feet apart.
C.
Ends returned to walls or terminate at walls to eliminate projection hazards.
D.
Members shall be without twists, bends, open joints, misalignment, or ragged edges.
E.
Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to
building structure. Members shall be true to length for assembly without fillers.
F.
Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
G.
Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to
accommodate site assembly and installation.
H.
Exposed surfaces: Free of mill scale, rust, pits, craters, and similar irregularities that affect
durability, strength, or appearance.
I.
Completed assembly: Strong, rigid, and neat in appearance.
J.
Mechanical Fasteners.
1. Metal compatible with pipe material.
2. Assembly of anchor bars, threaded fasteners, and related components to develop tight,
rigid connections.
3. Concealed fasteners.
K.
Welded Joints.
1. Comply with AWS D1.1 for steel.
2. Employ qualified operators skilled in making strong, neat welds.
3. Join parts as close as possible.
4. Remove loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, and foreign material to expose clean
surfaces for welding.
5. Joint Finish - NOMMA (National Ornamental and Miscellaneous Metals Association).
a. Finish 2 - Completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes.
6. Ground smooth with surfaces of welded members and burrs removed.
7. Sufficient size and length to develop required stresses.
L.
Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate
drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.
1. Rails exposed to thermal stress shall have expansion joints not over 20 feet apart.
M. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler.
N.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
2.05 STEEL FINISHES
A.
Zinc coat exterior components.
B.
Steel Designated Zinc Coated (Galvanized).
05 5213 - 3
June 16, 2016
1.
2.
Hot-dip zinc coating applied to components of designated items in accordance with ASTM
A123.
Damaged zinc coated surfaces and fasteners painted with.
a. Interzinc 52; International Protective Coatings.
b. Zinc Clad 5; Sherwin-Williams.
c. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B.
Take measurements at site and not from scale drawings.
C.
Inspect site and become familiar with conditions before starting installation. Make careful study
of drawings and become familiar with work constructed by other contractors before and during
installation.
D.
Method of erection and distribution of materials before and during erection shall make
allowance for obstructions resulting from work by other contractors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
for installation as work of other Sections.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight
joints.
C.
Install railings in compliance with ADA Standards for accessible design at applicable locations.
D.
Anchor railings securely to structure.
1. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush
countersunk fastenings.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, noncumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
05 5213 - 4
June 16, 2016
SECTION 10 1400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Traffic signs.
B.
Exterior signs.
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
B.
ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
C.
ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009
(ANSI).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3300 - for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for
fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter
sizes, fonts, and colors.
a. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect-Engineer prior to fabrication.
2. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for
project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in sign systems, with not less than 5 years of
documented experience in installing sign systems of type specified, and approved by
manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1
and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in event of conflicting requirements,
comply with most comprehensive and specific requirements.
B.
Traffic Signs: To match BJCC standards; locate where indicated on drawings.
C.
Parking Monumental Signs: to match BJCC standard designs, dimensions, and colors, as
shown in drawings included in project manual Appendix
2.02 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE MATERIALS
A.
Sign cabinet.
1. Fabricate from 0.100 inch thick aluminum sheet, Alloy 5005 in accordance with ANSI
H35.1.
2. 2 inch square aluminum tube framing.
3. 6 5/8 inch diameter tube support posts set in concrete footing.
10 1400 - 1
June 16, 2016
4.
Fluoropolymer finish as specified in Section 05 0510.
B.
Face graphics.
1. Routed aluminum-backed 3/16 inch thick white acrylic sheet.
2. Copy color: Match Architect's sample.
3. Logo color: Match Architect's sample.
C.
Lighting.
1. In accordance with UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory.
2. Four 84 inch, T12 CW/HO fluorescent lamps.
2.03 EXTERIOR FABRICATION
A.
General.
1. Survey field conditions and take measurements at jobsite prior to sign fabrication.
2. Finish.
a. Acid wash primer.
b. Spray finish paint to result in smooth, uniform surfaces.
c. Colors as indicated in sign description.
B.
Letter finish.
1. Mirror, buffed to high gloss finish on face surfaces.
2. Edge surfaces: Smooth and sandblast for natural metal finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INTERIOR SIGNAGE INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
C.
Locate signs where indicated:
1. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.
D.
Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
END OF SECTION
10 1400 - 2
June 16, 2016
SECTION 10 7500
FLAGPOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Aluminum Flagpoles.
A.
Section 03 3000: Concrete base and foundation construction
A.
B.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
C.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 3300 - for submittal procedures.
B.
For Information.
1. Product Data: Provide data on pole, accessories, and configurations.
C.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and
imposed loads.
2. Samples: Submit two aluminum, 6 inch by 6 inch in size, illustrating pole material, color,
and finish.
D.
For Closeout.
1. Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules.
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design flagpole foundation under direct supervision of Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed the State in which the
Project is located.
A.
Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling
requirements.
B.
Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in protective shipping tubes or
containers.
C.
Protect flagpole and accessories from damage or moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Flagpoles:
1. American Flagpole: www.americanflagpole.com.
2. Concord Industries, Inc.: www.concordindustries.com.
3. Pole-Tech Co., Inc.: www.poletech.com.
10 7500 - 1
June 16, 2016
4.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FLAGPOLES
A.
Flagpoles: Aluminum.
1. Design: Cone tapered.
2. Mounting: Ground mounted type.
3. Outside Butt Diameter: 8 inches.
4. Outside Tip Diameter: 4 inches.
5. Nominal Wall Thickness: 0.188 inches.
6. Nominal Height: 20 ft; measured from nominal ground elevation.
7. Halyard: Interior type.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1. Flagpole With Flag Flying: Resistant without permanent deformation to 115 miles/hr wind
velocity; non-resonant, safety design factor of 2.5.
2. Flagpole Without Flag: Resistant without permanent deformation to 175 miles/hr wind
velocity; non-resonant, safety design factor of 2.5.
2.03 POLE MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Finial Ball: Stainless steel, 8 inch diameter.
B.
Truck Assembly: Cast aluminum; revolving, stainless steel ball bearings, non-fouling.
C.
Banners: (2) 2'-0"x8'-0" Design To be Selected, nylon fabric, brass grommets, hemmed edges.
D.
Banner Brackets: 2'-6" wide
E.
Base cover: Spun Aluminum collar.
2.05 OPERATORS
A.
not used.
2.06 MOUNTING COMPONENTS
A.
Pole Base Attachment: Flush; aluminum base with base cover.
B.
Lightning Ground Rod: 18 inch long copper rod, 3/4 inch diameter.
C.
Lightning Ground Cable: Copper No. 6 AWG, soft drawn.
2.07 FINISHING
A.
Metal Surfaces in Contact With Concrete: Asphaltic paint.
B.
Concealed Steel Surfaces: Galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.
C.
Aluminum: satin / Bronze
D.
Finial: Spun finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with
asphaltic paint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
June 16, 2016
10 7500 - 2
June 16, 2016
B.
Refer to Section 03 3000 for placement of anchor devices and foundation sleeve.
C.
Electrically ground flagpole installation.
D.
Fill foundation tube sleeve with concrete specified in Section 03 3000.
E.
Install foundation plate and centering wedges for flagpoles base set in concrete base and
fasten.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 inch.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag functions smoothly.
END OF SECTION
June 16, 2016
10 7500 - 3
June 16, 2016
SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
BJCC PREMIER PARKING LOT P13 ENHANCEMENT
26 0505 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0534 – CONDUIT
26 0923 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 2416 – PANELBOARDS
26 5600 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING
ED
A
G
B AM
I S T ER
A
LA
RE
A
NK
I NE
E
ER
E
FR
NG
R
No. 8068
PROFESSIONAL
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
M. C
6/16/16
SECTION 26 0505
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.2
1.3
The "General Conditions" and "Special Conditions" of Contract as written and
referred to hereinbefore are adopted and made part of Division 00.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Provide equipment, labor, etc., required to install complete working electrical
system as shown and specified.
B.
Provide equipment and/or wiring normally furnished or required for complete
electrical systems but not specifically specified on the drawings or in
specifications, as though specified by both.
C.
All equipment and wiring shall be new and bear U.L. label.
D.
Electrical work includes, but is not limited to:
1.
Arrange with local utility companies for services as shown or specified.
2.
Removal or relocation of electrical services located on or crossing
through project property, above or below grade, obstructing construction
of project or conflicting with completed project or any applicable code.
3.
Complete 600 volt Distribution System. Provide meters, switchboards,
panelboards, circuit breakers, power outlets, convenience outlets,
switches, and/or other equipment forming part of system.
4.
Complete exterior lighting.
5.
Provide temporary facilities for construction power.
6.
Testing of all systems
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:
A.
Obtain and pay for all permits required for work. Comply with all ordinances
pertaining to work described herein.
B.
Install work under this Division per drawings, specifications, latest edition of the
National Electrical Code, Local Building Codes, and any special codes having
jurisdiction over specific portions within complete installation. In event of conflict,
install work per most stringent code requirements determined by Engineer.
C.
Arrange, pay fees for and complete work to pass required tests by agencies
26 0505 - 1
June 16, 2016
having authority over work. Deliver to Engineer Certificates of Inspection and
approval issued by authorities.
1.4
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR:
A.
Has completed minimum two projects same size and scope in past five (5) years.
B.
This qualification applies to Sub-Contractors.
C.
Use workmen experienced in their respective trade. Submit qualifications of
Superintendent for review.
D.
Owner reserves right to reject bid of any Contractor failing to meet these
qualifications.
GENERAL JOB REQUIREMENTS:
A.
B.
Drawings and Specifications:
1.
Electrical work is shown on "E" series drawings inclusive. Follow any
supplementary drawings as though listed above.
2.
Drawings and specifications are complementary. Work called for by one
is binding as if called for by both.
3.
Drawings show general run of circuits and approximate location of
equipment. Right is reserved to change location of equipment and
devices, and routing of conduits to a reasonable extent, without extra cost
to Owner.
4.
Refer conflicts between drawings and specifications describing electrical
work and work under other Divisions to Engineer for remedial action.
5.
Use dimensions in figures in preference to scaled dimensions. Do not
scale drawings for exact sizes or locations.
6.
Execution of Contract is evidence that Contractor has examined all
drawings and specifications related to work, and is informed to extent and
character of work. Later claims for labor and materials required due to
difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had
examination been made, will not be recognized.
7.
Charges for extra work not allowed unless work authorized by written
order from Engineer approving charge for work.
Visit to Site:
1.
Visit site to survey existing conditions affecting work. Include necessary
materials and labor to accomplish the electrical work, including relocation
of existing services and utilities on building site in bid. No consideration
given to future claims due to existing conditions.
26 0505 - 2
June 16, 2016
C.
D.
E.
Definitions:
1.
Provide:
Furnish, install and connect complete.
2.
Wire:
Furnish all necessary wiring and connect complete.
3.
Install:
Set in place and wire complete.
4.
Work:
Materials completely installed and connected.
5.
AWG:
American Wire Gage.
6.
NEC:
National Electrical Code (latest edition)
7.
NFPA:
National Fire Protection Association.
8.
OSHA:
Occupation Safety and Health Administration.
9.
UL:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
10.
NEMA:
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
11.
IEEE:
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
Workmanship, Guarantee and Approval:
1.
Work under this Division shall be first class with emphasis on neatness
and workmanship.
2.
Install work using competent mechanics, under supervision of foreman,
all duly certified by local authorities. Installation subject to Engineer's
constant observation, final approval, and acceptance. Engineer may
reject unsuitable work.
3.
Furnish Engineer written guarantee, stating that if workmanship and/or
material executed under this Division is proven defective within one (1)
year after final acceptance, such defects and other work damaged will be
repaired and/or replaced at no cost to the owner.
4.
In event project is occupied or systems placed in operation in several
phases at Owner's request, guarantee will begin on date each system or
item of equipment is accepted by Owner.
Observations of Work and Demonstration of Operation:
1.
At observations of work, open panel covers, junction box covers, pull box
covers, device covers, and other equipment with removable plates for
check. Provide sufficient personnel to expedite cover removal and
replacement.
26 0505 - 3
June 16, 2016
2.
F.
Contractor to assist Engineer in demonstration of operation of new
systems to satisfaction of Owner. Contractor to have manufacturer
available for demonstration of systems where requested by Owner.
Testing of Electrical Systems:
1.
Test Completed work as follows:
a.
Perform test required by Engineer to indicate compliance with
specifications, drawings and applicable codes. Provide
instruments, labor and materials for tests.
b.
Receptacles:
(1)
2.
Ground Testing:
a.
G.
Use Woodhead Ground Loop Impedance Tester. Test
each receptacle. Record readings.
Testing of Made Ground Electrodes:
(1)
Test Ground Systems Indicated.
(2)
Using a measuring device which generates minimum of
500 VDC, calibrated in ohms (maximum 200 ohm scale)
J.C. Biddle "Vibrotester" or approved equivalent.
(3)
Provide test electrode in accordance with Measuring
Device Manufacturer's instructions. Use ground rods as
specified in Section "Grounding".
(4)
Follow instructions of measuring device manufacturer for
proper results.
(5)
Test grounds only when earth is dry.
(6)
Record ambient temperature, date, time, approximate
water table level (as obtained from local geologists); type
of earth material.
Submittals, Shop and Erection Drawings:
1.
Submit complete shop drawings for all material and equipment furnished
under Division 26 of specifications, to Engineer for review within (30) days
after award of contract. Shop drawings shall be submitted on timely basis
to allow adequate lead time for review, re-submission if necessary,
manufacture and delivery to allow access of material to project at correct
time based on schedule established by Architect/Contractor. Include
26 0505 - 4
June 16, 2016
complete descriptive data with dimensions, operating data and weight for
each item of equipment. Carefully examine shop drawings to assure
compliance with drawings and specifications prior to submittal to
Engineer. Shop drawings and submittals shall bear the stamp of approval
of the Electrical and General Contractor as evidence drawings have been
reviewed by both for compliance with the contract documents. Submittals
without this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned
for proper resubmission.
2.
Submittals, shop and erection drawings may be submitted as hard
(paper) copies or as electronic portable document files (PDF) format.
3.
Submit electronic copies as follows:
a. Submit three (3) original copies for review. Architect will retain two (2)
copies and return 1 copy to Contractor. Contractor is responsible for
reproducing the reviewed submittal for distribution.
H.
I.
4.
Submit electronic copies as follows:
a.
Submit one (1) electronic file for review. Engineer will return
electronic file to Contractor with comments. Contractor is
responsible for reproducing the reviewed submittal for distribution.
5.
Review of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
errors and omissions in shop drawings. Contractor is responsible for
dimensions and sizes of equipment. Inform Engineer in writing of
equipment differing from that shown.
6.
Prepare erection drawings when required by Engineer. Investigate
thoroughly all conditions affecting work and indicate on drawing. Engineer
will review erection drawings before work commences.
7.
Provide for Owner one (1) hard copy and one (1) electronic copy in
portable document file (PDF) format of final shop and erection drawings.
8.
Electrical Contractor shall coordinate exact location of lighting fixtures and
electrical equipment with civil and landscape drawings..
Cooperation:
1.
Carefully coordinate work with other contractors. Refer conflicts between
trades to Architect.
2.
Work to be installed as progress of project will allow. Schedule of work
determined by General Contractor and/or Architect.
Maintenance and Operating Instructions for Equipment:
1.
Submit to Engineer data prepared by manufacturer for each item of
electrical equipment completely describing equipment. Data to include
parts lists, description of operation, shop drawings, wiring diagrams,
26 0505 - 5
June 16, 2016
maintenance procedures and other literature required for maintenance of
equipment. Provide one (1) hard copy and one (1) electronic copy in
portable document (PDF) format. Bind hard copy in booklet form for
presentation and bind PDF copy in similar manner.
J.
K.
Record Drawings:
1.
Provide "Record" drawings at the completion of job.
2.
Keep a complete set of contract drawings on job and record day to day
changes with red pencil. Indicate actual location of conduit systems,
outlets, and equipment. Drawing set shall be maintained in good order
Turn prints over to Engineer at final observation.
3.
Contractor shall transfer information from the marked-up record drawings
to the AutoCAD files and turn both over to Engineer as a part of the closeout documents.
Items for Owner:
1.
L.
M.
Provide following items for Owner at time of substantial completion:
a.
Certificates of inspection and approval from authorities having
jurisdiction.
b.
Written guarantees.
c.
Record drawings.
d.
Final approved submittals and shop drawings, one (1) hard copy
and one (1) electronic copy in PDF format.
e.
Maintenance data, one (1) hard copy and one (1) electronic copy
in PDF format.
f.
Affidavit of Owner Instruction (1 copy).
Marking:
1.
Identify each starter, (including starters furnished under Mechanical
Section), panelboard, cabinet, control device, breaker, disconnect and
safety switch with 1/4" high black letters cut in a white laminated phenolic
strip. Attach to enclosure with two (2) metal screws or with an epoxy
adhesive.
2.
Nameplates required for other items in this Division similar to those
described above.
Protection and Storage:
1.
2.
3.
Provide warning lights, bracing, shoring, rails, guards and covers
necessary to prevent damage or injury.
Do not leave exposed or unprotected, electrical items carrying current.
Protect personnel from exposure to contact with electricity.
Protect work and materials from damage by weather, entrance of water or
dirt. Cap conduit during installation.
26 0505 - 6
June 16, 2016
N.
O.
4.
Avoid damage to materials and equipment in place. Repair, or remove
and replace damaged work and materials.
5.
Exercise particular care when working around telephone (electronic)
equipment to prevent entrance of dust, moisture and debris into the
equipment. Provide dust barriers and partitions as required.
6.
Deliver equipment and materials to job site in original, unopened, labeled
container. Store to prevent damage and injury. Store ferrous materials to
prevent rusting. Store finished materials and equipment to prevent
staining and discoloring. Store materials affected by condensation in
warm dry areas. Provide heaters. Storage space on site and in building
designated by Owner/ Engineer.
7.
Install equipment per manufacturer's recommendations. Conflicts
between contract documents and these recommendations, referred to
Engineer.
Excavation and Backfill:
1.
Excavate for work in this Division.
2.
Avoid existing facilities in excavating. Contractor is responsible for repair
and replacement of damaged facilities in executing work.
3.
Backfill in twelve inch (12") lifts, wetted down and tamped. Compaction
minimum 95% of adjacent earth.
4.
Repairing to be comparable to work cut including new asphalt paving,
concrete paving, sod, replanting shrubbery, etc. Engineer will observe
repair work, and reject unsuitable work.
Cutting and Repairing:
1.
P.
Anchors:
1.
Q.
Cut and repair any concrete/asphalt required to install work. Where work
cut is finished, employ original installer of finish to repair finish.
Provide anchors for all equipment, raceways, hangers, etc. to safely
support weight of item involved. Anchors to consist of expansion type
devices similar to "Redhead" or lead expansion anchors. Plastic anchors
are not acceptable.
Cleaning and Painting:
1.
Clean equipment furnished in this Division after completion of work.
2.
Touch-up or re-paint damaged painted finishes.
3.
Remove debris, packing cartons, scrap, etc., from site.
26 0505 - 7
June 16, 2016
R.
Control Wiring:
1.
S.
Control Wiring including low voltage and line voltage interlock wiring will
be furnished and installed under another Division, except where
specifically shown otherwise. Carefully coordinate power and control
wiring interface.
Code Compliance:
1. Entire electrical installation shall comply with all aspects of code including
local interpretations. This includes but is not limited to:
a. Installation adjustment to meet all code clearances between
electrical such as ductwork, other HVAC, plumbing, fire protection,
and structural systems.
2. No additional compensation will be allowed for code compliance.
Engineer of difficulty encountered for assistance.
Notify
26 0505 - 8
June 16, 2016
SECTION 26 051
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
Furnishing, installing and testing 600 volt conductors for lighting, power, and
auxiliary systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS:
A.
98% conductivity copper; #12 AWG minimum; #10 AWG and smaller solid, #8
and larger stranded.
B.
Conductors furnished with NEC, 600 volt, insulation as follows:
All Conductor types
D.
Luminaire Wire: Incandescent - Use type SF-2, #16 for luminaires up to 300
watts, and #14 over 300 watts, except for luminaires in concrete pour use #12 or
larger or as shown. Conductors in channels of, and flex to fluorescent luminaires
type THHN or XHHW.
E.
Color Code as follows and/or per local ordinances. Conductors #10 and smaller
with colored insulation. For conductors #8, and larger color code with colored
pressure sensitive tape. Apply minimum 2" of tape to each individual phase
conductor in half lapped pattern. The equipment ground conductor shall be taped
green for its entire exposed length. Color-code as follows:
F.
Phase
120/240V
A
Black
B
Red
C
Orange
Neutral
White
Equip.
Ground
Green
Manufacturers of copper conductors: Pirelli, Phelps Dodge, Capital Cable, Rome
Southwire, Senator, Essex, American, or approved equal.
26 051 - 1
June 16, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Install wiring complete with connections to equipment.
B.
No wiring installed until after plastering and similar work is complete and dry.
C.
Install wiring so conductors are not in tension in completed system.
D.
Form wiring neatly and group in circuits. Tie grouped conductors with nylon ties,
T&B "Tyrap" or approved equal.
E.
Use pulling compound of Ideal "Yellow 77", Minerallac No. 100, or approved
equal. Do not use pulling compound for circuits on secondary side of ungrounded
isolation transformers.
F.
Join and terminate copper conductors individually.
1.
Lugs connected to panel bus and feeds 100 amps and larger: Solid 98%
conductivity long copper barrel, tin plated, compression type connectors,
Thomas & Betts color keyed, Burndy “Hydent” or approved equal; applied
with appropriate hydraulic tool.
G.
Provide lugs where not furnished as part of equipment -furnish as specified
above, to connect all conductors.
H.
Make conductor taps #8 and larger from a second conductor with 98%
conductivity bolted insulated connector, T&B "IDT", Ilsco "KUP-L-TAP" or
approved equivalent. Insulate splices with 600 volt "heat shrink" covers T&B or
equal.
I.
Joints #10 and smaller: T&B Sta-Kon wire joints EPT66M, with insulating caps,
installed with WT161 Tool or C nest of WT11M Tool; Ideal Super/Nuts; Ideal
Wing Nuts; 3M "Scotchlock" or Buchanan Electric Products B Cap or Series
2000 Pressure connectors complete with nylon snap on insulators installed with
C24 pressure tool. Where conductors are connected to screw terminals, use
nylon insulated, locking fork, T&B Sta-Kon or approved equal. Where joints are
made in damp or wet locations insulate splices with 600 volt “heat shrink” covers
T&B or equal.
J.
Bond circuit ground wires where installed to all devices, equipment, outlet and
junction boxes, and grounding bushings (where provided) with a full size
conductor and screw type connection.
K.
Securely fasten non-ferrous identifying tapes, pressure sensitive labels or
engraved nameplates to all cables, feeders and power circuits in vaults, pull
boxes, manholes, switchboard rooms, terminations of cables, etc.
L.
Mark all branch circuit conductors at panel terminations including neutrals with
pressure sensitive numbers to correspond to circuit numbers connected.
26 051 - 2
June 16, 2016
M.
Connect circuits and feeders as shown on drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic
and do not show every detail required in the wiring system. Detail wiring
accomplished per NEC.
N.
DO NOT COMBINE CIRCUITS unless specifically approved by the Engineer. No
more than 3 phase or current carrying conductors in a circuit.
26 051 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK:
A.
Grounding Details
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM GROUNDING:
A.
Bond and ground main service neutral, cabinets, equipment, conduits, metallic
piping systems, etc., per the latest edition of NEC.
B.
Ground conductors - 98% conductivity copper, either bare or with green THW
insulation. Other conductor requirements same as described for low voltage, 600
volts, conductors.
C.
Ground Connections:
D.
1.
Make with mechanical connectors where accessible and with "Cadweld"
or approved equivalent where inaccessible.
2.
Use high alloy cast copper and/or silicon bronze mechanical connectors
with Hex or Allen head bolts where permitted.
3.
Use Burndy "GAR" approved equivalent..
4.
Thoroughly clean prior to installation of clamps and/or lugs.
5.
Use bolted or screwed on mechanical connectors. Do not use clip-on
connections.
6.
Bond ground conductor to metal raceway at each end of the run.
7.
Seal connections between dissimilar metals (i.e.: bronze to steel), with
approved epoxy resin.
8.
Coat connections with "No-OXID-A" compound as manufactured by
Dearborn Chemical Company.
Provide lighting and power circuits with green covered ground wire sized per
NEC, or as shown, except not smaller than #12 AWG. Bond ground wire to all
outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes, cabinets, equipment, etc., with self-tapping
screw or bolt and appropriate lug. See Section covering "Conduit" for use of
26 0526 - 1
June 16, 2016
grounding bushing.
2.2
DRIVEN GROUND SYSTEM:
A.
Provide driven ground rods and buried ground conductor interconnecting ground
rods as shown on drawings and required by code.
B.
Ground rods 3/4"x10'-0" copper clad steel, Thompson #558 or approved equal.
Ground rods installed with tops driven to 1'-6" minimum below grade. Connect
ground wire to ground rod with Thompson #493 “U” bolt bronze clamp.
C.
Exterior buried ground conductor #2/0, soft drawn, bare, tinned copper, installed
2'-0" minimum below grade.
D.
Bond all masses of metal, i.e.: pipes, conduits, fence posts, etc., within 6'-0" of
the buried ground conductor to ground conductor with #6 AWG bare, solid, tinned
copper wire, attached to object with appropriate clamp, lug, etc., (Cadweld or
equal). Obtain complete set of drawings to determine quantity and location of
required connections.
E.
All connectors lugs, hardware, etc., for building ground system similar to that for
other grounding as described above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT GROUND 'GREEN WIRE CONCEPT':
A.
Ground electrical equipment enclosures and conductor enclosures including
metal raceways, outlet boxes, cabinets, switch boxes, metallic piping systems
such as water, gas, waste, air and metallic enclosures for all electrical
equipment.
B.
Provide separate grounding conductor for all circuits to insure adequate ground
fault return path.
C.
Install separate ground conductors in conduit.
D.
Bond green wire to equipment enclosure at source and at apparatus served.
E.
Insulate grounding conductors size to carry ground fault current safely. Minimum
size for green wire grounding lead per N.E.C. or as indicated.
F.
Do not use grounded current return conductors (neutrals) for equipment
grounding.
Connect common grounding lead to supply side of service
disconnect unit only.
G.
Do not ground neutral conductor after it has been grounded at service entrance,
transformer or generator.
H.
Maintain electrical continuity of conduit systems by threaded fittings with joints
26 0526 - 2
June 16, 2016
I.
J.
made-up wrench tight. Install insulated bushing and locknuts on terminating
conduits. Provide conduits containing ground wires with grounding bushings
bonded to ground wire with short full size jumper.
Install ground rods in quantity to provide a maximum of [5] ohms ground
resistance. Where multiple rods required, separate a minimum of 6 feet and
interconnect with wire of ground size shown.
Test ground systems as specified in Section 26 0505.
26 0526 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 26 0534
CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
Installation of raceway systems and necessary fittings for all work in Division 26.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metallic Raceways:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Triangle
Walker
Western
AFC
Carlon
National Pipe & plastics
3.
4.
Can-Tex
Allied
Thomas & Betts
Hubbell: RACO; Killark
Appleton
Midwest
5.
6.
7.
8.
EFCOR
OZ Gedney
Bridgeport
AFC
Fittings
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
5.
6.
7.
8.
Non-Metallic Raceways:
1.
2.
C.
Republic
Wheatland
Allied
Clifton
RACEWAYS
A.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit:
1.
Conform to ASA Standard C80.1 and U.L. Standard No. 6 for rigid
metallic conduit, except hot dipped galvanized after threading.
2.
Fittings, ells, couplings, etc., galvanized threaded type meeting above
standards. Threadless fittings not allowed.
3.
Terminate rigid conduit with two locknuts, one inside, one outside of the
cabinet, junction or outlet and a bushing. Bushing - malleable iron with
smooth bakelite ring molded into edge of bushing to prevent damage to
cable, OZ Mfg. Co., type "B" or approved equal.
26 0534 - 1
June 16, 2016
4.
B.
Where grounding bushings are required, construction of bushing similar
to above except a lug provided for grounding connection, OZ type "BLG"
or approved equal.
Rigid intermediate grade conduit, IMC, to conform to UL Standard No.1242; hot
dipped galvanized or approved equivalent.
1.
All fittings, ells, couplings, etc., constructed to same standards as rigid
steel conduit. Fittings - threaded type with all threads engaged. Use "Uniswivel" couplings in dry locations only.
2.
Conduit terminations same as rigid steel conduit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A.
Install conduit as follows:
1.
Use rigid steel or intermediate grade conduit for:
.
a.
Circuits exposed to mechanical damage.
2.
Use PVC conduit for:
b.
c.
d.
e.
Circuits run underground where indicated.
For branch circuits in concrete slab.
Where specifically shown on drawings.
No PVC shall be exposed.
B.
Size conduit per NEC. Minimum size 1/2" diameter, but no more than three (3)
#12 installed in 1/2" conduit.
C.
Run conduit concealed where possible.
D.
Furnish offsets required to meet field conditions. Make bends in conduit in
accordance with the National Electrical Code, except make minimum radius of 6
times conduit diameter or 6" whichever is greater. Bend IMC conduit without
deforming.
E.
Terminate conduits entering sheet metal boxes with double locknuts and
bushings. Terminate conduit exposed to moisture with watertight hubs.
F.
Install appropriate seal-off where conduits exit hazardous areas, areas of
temperature differential etc.
G.
Where ground conductor installed in conduits 1-1/4" and larger provide grounding
bushings, and bond full size ground wire to bushings and from bushing to box or
cabinet. Bond with self-tapping screw and appropriate lug. Where ground wires
are run in smaller conduits, bond to outlet and junction boxes with self-tapping
26 0534 - 2
June 16, 2016
screw lug. Provide other conduits with non-grounding bushings as described
under another article. Provide all service entrance metallic raceways with
grounding bushing and bond to ground bus; bond sized per N.E.C.
H.
PVC Conduit Installation:
1.
Above ground: Allow for expansion and contraction.
2.
Below grade: Encase in 3" sand fill. Backfill free of large rocks and debris.
3.
Make elbows, bends, etc. with heated bender when factory bends are not
available. When below slab, provide rigid elbows.
4.
Make cuts with hacksaw and deburr ends.
5.
Make joints as follows: Clean outside of conduit to depth of socket, and
inside of socket with approved cleaner. Apply solvent cement to interior of
socket and exterior of conduit, Insert conduit in socket and rotate 1/4 to
1/2 turn and allow to dry.
6.
Where non-metallic conduit is used for power wiring install insulated
ground wire, sized per NEC unless shown larger.
26 0534 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 26 0923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.3
Furnish and install automatic lighting control devices as shown on the drawings
and as described herein.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 00 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1.
2.
1.4
1.5
Time switches.
Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches and daylight sensors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
B.
PIR: Passive infrared.
C.
FC: Footcandle
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide manufacturer’s product information including device ratings, physical
characteristics, performance data and installation details toEngineer for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Line-Voltage Surge Protection: An integral part of the devices for 120- and 277V solid-state equipment.
For devices without integral line-voltage surge
protection, field-mounting surge protection shall comply with IEEE C62.41 and
with UL 1449.
TIME SWITCHES
A.
Digital Time Switches:
Electronic, solid-state programmable units with
alphanumeric display complying with UL 917.
26 0923 - 1
June 16, 2016
1.
Contact Configuration: SPDT (Single-Pole Double-Throw)
2.
Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120/208/240/277 Vac. Contact output
for both maintained and momentary (pulse) to allow control of latching
contactors.
3.
Program: 4 channels.
a.
2.3
For each channel, provide daily, weekly, or yearly schedules with
a minimum of 1000 set points and an annual holiday schedule (up
to 99 holidays) to override normal schedule.
4.
Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on
and off function of a program on selected channels.
5.
Astronomical Time: User scheduled for on or off function of a program on
selected channels.
6.
Battery Backup: 8 year lithium battery.
7.
Memory: All programming and time functions shall be stored in EEPROM
non-volatile memory.
8.
Surge Protection: Circuitry shall utilize transient voltage surge protection
for voltage surges up to 6000V.
9.
Manual and Remote override.
10.
Approved Products: “Next Generation” series by Intermatic or equivalent
by Tork.
OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A.
Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or
1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, microprocessor
input, and complying with UL 773A.
1.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16 to 108 lx), with an
adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a
directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from
causing turn-off.
2.
Time Delay: Instant ON;10-second delay OFF, to prevent false operation.
3.
Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor type, complying with IEEE C62.41
for Category A1 locations.
4.
Mounting: Twist lock receptacle complying with ANSI/IEEE C136.10, with
base mounting accessory as required to direct sensor to the North sky
exposure.
26 0923 - 2
June 16, 2016
B.
2.4
MULTIPOLE LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A.
B.
2.5
Approved Product: K4536SS by Intermatic, or equal by Tork or Paragon.
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2.
ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3.
Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation.
4.
GE Industrial Systems.
5.
Square D
Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, complying with NEMA
ICS 2 and UL 508.
1.
Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load
served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast
(ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load
current).
2.
Control-Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller
than No. 12 AWG.
B.
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper
conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG.
C.
Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors
not smaller than No. 14 AWG.
D.
Provide unshielded, twisted-pair cable for control and signal transmission
conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SENSOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install according to manufacturer’s instructions. Install and aim sensors in
locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not
exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
26 0923 - 3
June 16, 2016
B.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Do not install ultrasonic or dual-technology occupancy sensors closer than 4 feet
from air supply outlets / diffusers.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors."
conduit size shall be ¾ inch.
Minimum
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points.
Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Provide field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices
locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.
D.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written
instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment
enclosures.
F.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring.
B.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. Provide a
typewritten directory identifying circuits and spaces controlled by contactors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has
been energized, adjust and test in compliance with manufacturer
recommendations.
2.
Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays
per manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they
do not function properly.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, may be performed to
determine compliance of work with specified requirements.
26 0923 - 4
June 16, 2016
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
Furnish and install all lighting and power panelboards as shown on the drawings
and described herein.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Provide shop drawings including an individual diagram of each panelboard
showing all specified requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL:
A.
Panelboards shown on the drawings are based on Square D’s published
information relative to physical size and arrangement. The contractor shall verify
that equipment to be furnished can be mounted in space provided and meet the
requirements of the National Electric Code for clearances.
B.
Panelboards to be constructed in accordance with latest NEMA and UL
standards.
C.
All panelboards to be of the same manufacturer as other distribution equipment.
D.
Panelboard assembly to be UL labeled, and UL labeled as service entrance
equipment where used for that purpose.
E.
Panelboards to have integrated equipment fault rating equal to interrupting rating
of lowest rated overcurrent device.
F.
Panelboards shall be factory assembled and breakers shall be arranged exactly
as shown on the drawings.
PANEL INTERIOR:
A.
Bussing:
1.
98% conductivity copper, silver-plated at joints or equivalent plated 55%
conductivity aluminum.
2.
Bus assembly designed for a maximum temperature rise of 55 degree C
above 40 degree C ambient temperature when carrying rated current.
3.
Minimum thickness of bus bars - 3/32".
26 2416 - 1
June 16, 2016
B.
C.
D.
4.
Bussing braced to withstand a fault current equal to the highest device
interrupting capacity in the panel.
5.
Neutral bus full size copper or aluminum sized on same basis as phase
busses and insulated from the cabinet.
6.
Arrange bus bar connections so that adjacent vertical circuit protective
devices are consecutively connected to phases A, B, and C throughout
panel. Provide full capacity ground bus in each panel cabinet, isolated
from cabinet. Where indicated for Isolated Ground, provide second
ground bus isolated from cabinet.
Cable terminations:
1.
Include neutral and ground connections as shown.
2.
Make with separate, individual heavy duty copper or bronze lugs Thomas
& Betts “Lock-tite”, solid copper barrel compression type, Thomas & Betts
color keyed, Burndy “Hydent”, or approved equivalent.
3.
Make with separate, individual heavy duty copper or bronze lugs Thomas
& Betts "Lock-tite", solid copper barrel compression type, Thomas & Betts
color keyed, Burndy "Hydent", or approved equivalent.
4.
Use 2 bolt tongue or equivalent connection to bus for #1/0 or larger
cables.
5.
Securely bolt lugs to bus with bolts, nuts and lock washers.
6.
Feed-through lugs (one set of lugs on each end of main vertical bus) is
not acceptable unless approved by Engineer.
Circuit breakers:
1.
Molded case, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, trip free on
faults, thermal-inverse time delay element and magnetic instantaneous
trip coil in each ungrounded
phase conductor, or approved equivalent
solid state trip unit.
2.
Engrave breaker ampere rating on handle or trip unit.
3.
Furnish multi-pole breakers with internal common trip.
4.
Ground fault breakers class "A" type to trip on fault currents of 4-6 ma.
5.
Main circuit breakers UL rated for service entrance use.
6.
Switch "SWD" rated where required by NEC.
Surge Protection Device / Transient Voltage Surge Suppression:
26 2416 - 2
June 16, 2016
E.
1.
Panelboard shall be provided by UL 1449 listed and CSA 22.2 certified
transient voltage surge suppressor where shown. The panelboard
SPD/TVSS shall be tested and suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Cat. C1
(6kV, 3kA) environments.
2.
Suppressor shall be included and mounted within the panelboards by the
manufacturer of the equipment. See panelboard schedule for panelboard
with TVSS.
3.
The panelboard shall be constructed using a direct bus bar connection
(no cable connection between bus bar and SPD/TVSS). Panelboards
that use a wire connection do not meet the intent of this specification
4.
All monitoring diagnostics features such as indicator lights, trouble alarms
and surge counter shall be visible from the front of the panelboard.
Panelboards classified by type over-current protection as follows:
1.
F.
2.3
2.4
BQL
Bolted quick-lag circuit breaker distribution, 0-100 ampere
branches, with minimum interrupting rating of 10,000
symmetrical amperes at 240volts. Equivalent to Square D
type “NQOD”, Siemens type “S1”, General Electric type
‘AQ’ or Eaton/Cutler-Hammer type ‘PRL2a’.
All space in panelboards usable. Panelboard space provided with necessary
connections for future installation of overcurrent devices.
CABINETS:
A.
Code thickness, hot dip galvanized steel or painted with trim and door.
Hardware: combination latch and cylinder lock, all keyed the same. Provide
celluloid or plastic covered directory card holder on the inside of door. Trim, door
and exposed interior shall be finished with factory prime and smooth finish coat
of the color selected by Engineer Reinforce cabinets as necessary for service
and short circuit rating intended.
B.
Surface as indicated of sufficient size to allow minimum 3" gutter space each side
of panel and eight inches (8") at top and bottom, minimum 20" wide. Provide
adjustable trim clamp, semi-flush hinges and inside rabbet.
C.
Provide panels with fully hinged front cover.
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Panelboards manufactured by Square D, Siemens, and General Electric, or
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
26 2416 - 3
June 16, 2016
3.2
A.
Mount panelboards per drawing details.
B.
Where two sets of feeder cables are required in panel gutter space, run one set
in each side of panel.
C.
Close all unused openings.
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Provide and engraved laminated plastic nameplate showing name and voltage
on each panelboard.
B.
Permanently attach nameplates and circuit numbers to panel using screws or an
epoxy adhesive.
C.
Use horizontal consecutive circuit numbers for lighting and appliance panels as
shown in panelboard schedules.
D.
Provide typewritten circuit directories describing service of each circuit in Types
BQL panels
26 2416 - 4
June 16, 2016
SECTION 26 5600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Furnish and install all lighting luminaires, with all necessary accessories and
lamps, as shown, specified, and/or scheduled.
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
Refer to section 26 0923 for Lighting Control Devices.
B.
Refer Division 01 for allowances and Owner-furnished items to be installed under
this Section.
ABBREVIATIONS:
A.
HID
High Intensity Discharge (metal halide, high pressure sodium, low
pressure sodium light sources).
B.
IC Rated
Lighting fixture rated for direct contact with insulation
C.
LED
Light Emitting Diode
D.
PF
Power Factor
E.
RLO
Relative Light Output
F.
THD
Total harmonic distortion
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Shop drawing submittals for luminaires shall include the following for each
Luminaire: complete construction details including all dimensions, complete
Description of materials used, complete electrical data (including operating
Voltage), photometric test report from an independent testing lab, complete
description of finish, and manufacturer catalog cutsheet of lamp to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMINAIRES:
A.
Furnish and install luminaires as shown in luminaire schedule, or otherwise
indicated on the drawings. Manufacturer catalog numbers shown are for general
descriptive purposes, and are only intended to establish the standard of quality.
26 5600 - 1
June 16, 2016
2.2
B.
Locations of luminaires shown on electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Verify
location of luminaires with architectural, civil, and landscape drawings prior to
installation. Conflicts between electrical and architectural drawings shall be
referred to the Architect for resolution prior to installation.
C.
Provide luminaires complete with all options, accessories and other
appurtenances required for a complete installation. Contractor shall coordinate
fixture mounting with type ceiling and wall construction, and provide luminaires
with all necessary installation hardware properly configured for the type
construction.
D.
All luminaires shall be UL listed for the application.
E.
Metal luminaire housings shall be free of tool marks, dents, burrs and sharp
edges. All metal parts shall be painted, galvanized, or otherwise corrosionresistant.
F.
Reflector surfaces shall be finished specular, semi-specular, diffuse or painted as
indicated. Specular finish materials shall have a minimum reflectance value of
83%. Semi-specular or diffuse finish shall have reflectance of 75% and white
painted finish materials shall have reflectance of 88%.
G.
Plastic lenses and shielding shall meet NFPA and local building code
requirements for light transmitting plastics.
BALLASTS AND TRANSFORMERS:
A.
All ballasts and transformers used in luminaires shall be ETL approved and/or UL
listed. Transformers for low-voltage lighting systems shall be UL listed for that
application.
B.
Provide fuse for each ungrounded conductor supplying each ballast or
transformer.
1.
2.3
H.I.D.: provide HEB/KTK fuse of proper size/rating for each ballast.
C.
Luminaires installed in environments with ambient temperature below 32 degree
F shall be provided with ballast appropriately rated for the ambient environment.
D.
Ballasts for each lamp type shall use a consistent form factor for all luminaires
throughout the project using that lamp type.
E.
Luminaires with ballasts that can be serviced in place shall incorporate a means
of disconnecting the conductors supplying the ballast in compliance with 2005
N.E.C. Article 410.73(G).
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS:
A.
Metal Halide:
26 5600 - 2
June 16, 2016
2.4
Furnish Metal Halide luminaires with Auto-Regulating or ConstantWattage Auto transformer ballast. Ballast shall be high power factor (PF
> 0.9) and operate lamp within ANSI standards for lamp starting and
operation. Ballast shall regulate lamp power within 10% with line voltage
variation of +/- 10% and shall keep lamp energized with line voltage drop
not exceeding 30%.
2.
Furnish pulse start luminaire / lamp system where indicated. Pulse start
ballasts shall be linear-reactor on super CWA type.
LAMPS:
A.
Furnish lamps for all luminaires as specified in Luminaire Schedule, otherwise
provide lamp as recommended by luminaire manufacturer.
B.
Lamps shall be new, delivered to the project site in their original packing, and
shall be of the same manufacturer for each luminaire type. Install lamps
immediately. Do not use lamps for construction purposes.
C.
Warranty lamps as follows:
D.
2.5
1.
1.
HID: One (1) year
2.
LED: Five (5) years
3.
Warranty begins from date of substantial completion.
4.
All lamps shall be free of defects and covered by an implied warranty
based on industry - accepted lamp mortality. Lamps failing at a higher
than normal rate shall be replaced upon determination of cause of failure
or defeat.
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps:
1.
All high intensity discharge lamps shall be operated on the appropriate
ANSI designated electromagnetic ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.4.
2.
Metal halide lamps: All metal halide lamps used in interior applications
shall be coated, unless otherwise noted in the lighting fixture schedule.
Otherwise, provide clear or coated lamp as recommended by luminaire
manufacturer. All metal halide lamps used in open aperture luminaire
shall contain a protective shroud / other suitable containment material for
use in open fixtures (“O" rated).
LED PRODUCTS
A.
LEDs shall be manufactured by Nichia. Other manufacturers will be considered if
submitted for review at least 10 days prior to bid.
26 5600 - 3
June 16, 2016
B.
Lumen Output:
1.
C.
Minimum initial delivered lumen output of the luminaire shall be as follows
for the lumens exiting the luminaire in the 0 to 360 degree zone, as
measured by IESNA Standard LM-79-08 in an accredited lab. Exact
testing lumen output shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings.
a.
Type XX – 8 ¼” x 4’ – 3400 (30 watts max.) or 4800 (45 watts
max.) nominal delivered lumens at 3500k per specification.
b.
Type YY – 8 ¼” x 8’ – 6800 (60 watts max.) or 9600 (90 watts
max.) nominal delivered lumens at 3500k per specification.
c.
Lumen output shall not decrease by no more than 20% over the
minimum operational life of 50,000 hours at the rated ambient
operating temperature.
2.
Individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the
failure of one LED will not result in the loss of all LEDs within the
luminaire.
3.
LED boards shall be suitable for field maintenance and have plug-in
connectors. LED boards shall be upgradeable.
4.
Light Color/Quality:
a.
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) range as specification,
between 3000K, 3500K and 4000K shall be correlated to
chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the
2-D CIE chromaticity chart. (Edit color temperature per project
specification)
b.
Color shift over 6,000 hours shall be <0.007 change in u’ v’ as
demonstrated in IES LM80 report.
c.
The Color Rendition Index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater.
d.
LED boards to be tested for color consistency and shall be within
a space of 2.5 MacAdam ellipses on the CIE chromaticity chart.
LED Power Supply and Drive
1.
Driver: Acceptable manufacturer: eldoLED
2.
Ten-year expected life while operating at maximum case temperature and
90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
26 5600 - 4
June 16, 2016
3.
Drive shall be UL Recognized under the component program and shall be
modular for simple field replacement. Drivers that do not meet these
requirements will not be accepted.
4.
Electrical characteristics: 120 – 277 volt, UL Listed, CSA Certified, Sound
Rated A+. Driver shall be > 80% efficient at full load across all input
voltages. Input wires shall be 18AWG solid copper minimum.
5.
Flicker: Driver and luminaire electronics shall deliver illumination that is
free from objectionable flicker as measured by flicker index (ANSI/IES
RP-16-10). At all points within the dimming range from 100-0.1 percent
luminaire shall have:
a.
b.
D.
Less than 1 percent flicker index at frequencies below 120 Hz.
Less than 12 percent flicker index at 120 Hz, and shall not
increase at greater than 0.1 percent per Hz to a maximum of 80
percent flicker index at 800Hz.
6.
Driver disconnect shall be provided where required to comply with codes.
7.
The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the SSL
luminaire and be accessible per UL requirements.
8.
The surge protection which resides within the drive shall protect the
luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as
defined in ANSI/IEEE C64.41 2002 for Location Category A, where failure
does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event.
Electrical
1.
Power Consumption: Maximum power consumption, +/- 5% when
operating between 120 – 277V (or 346V) shall be as follows:
a.
Type XX – 8 ¼” x 4’ – 30 watts and 45 watts nominal
b.
Type YY – 8 ¼” x 8’ – 60 watts and 90 watts nominal
2.
Operation Voltage – The luminaire shall operate from a 60 Hz ± 3 Hz AC
line over a voltage ranging from 120 VAC to 277 VAC. The fluctuations of
line voltage of (+/= 10%) shall have no visible effect on the luminous
output.
3.
Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 90% or greater
at all standard operating voltages and full luminaire output.
4.
THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC
power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent at any standard
input boltage and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD
requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve
allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD.
26 5600 - 5
June 16, 2016
5.
Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to
withstand high repetition noise and other interference and withstand up to
a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI
C62.41 Category A.
6.
Inrush Current: Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430
Amps per 10 Amps load with a maximum of 370 A²s.
7.
RF Interference: The luminaire and associated on-board circuitry must
meet Class A emission limits referred to in Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 Non-Consumer
requirements for EMI/RFI emissions.
8.
Driver must support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire
upgrades and enhancements and deliver improved performance:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Adjustment of forward LED voltage, supporting 3V through 60V.
Adjustment of LED current from 200mA to 1.05A at the 100
percent control input point in increments of 1mA.
Adjustment for operating hours to maintain constant lumens
(within 5 percent ) over the 50,000 hour design life of the system,
and deliver up to 20 percent energy savings early in the life cycle.
9.
Electrical connections between normal power and driver must be modular
utilizing a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily
accessible after installation and be replaceable without lowering the
luminaire.
10.
All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant.
Photometric Requirements
1.
Luminaire performance shall be tested as described herein.
2.
Luminaire performance shall be judged against the specified minimum
illuminance in the specified pattern for a particular application.
3.
Luminaire lighting performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) for the
minimum life expectancy (Section 2.2.4).
a.
The performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) by using the
LED manufacturer’s data or the data from the IESNA Standard
TM-21 test report, whichever one results in a higher level of lumen
depreciation.
b.
The ratio of the peak-to-zenith maximum candela ratios shall be1.94:1 @ 127.5 degrees.
26 5600 - 6
June 16, 2016
c.
The luminaire may be determined to be compliant photometrically,
if:
(1)
(2)
F.
The initial minimum illuminance level is achieved in 100%
of the area of the specified lighting pattern.
The measurements shall be calibrated to standard
photopic calibrations.
Thermal Management
1.
The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of
sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the
expected useful life (Section 2.2.7 (c)).
2.
The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the expected
life (Section 2.2.7 (c)) shall not be exceeded at the average operating
ambient (Section 2.2.2)
3.
The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the
catastrophic failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating
ambient temperature (Section 2.2.3).
4.
The luminaire shall have a UL or CSA rating.
5.
The Driver manufacturer’s maximum case temperature shall not be
exceeded at the maximum operating ambient temperature. Thermal
management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other
mechanical cooling devices shall not be allowed.
G.
Optics
1.
Optics shall consist of high performance advanced optical film, diffuser,
and metal reflector.
2.
Optics shall eliminate source image.
H.
Luminaire Identification
I.
1.
Each luminaire shall have the manufacturer’s name, trademark, model
number, serial number, date of manufacture (month-year), and lot number
as identification permanently marked inside each unit and the outside of
each packaging box.
2.
The following operating characteristics shall be permanently marked
inside each unit: rated voltage and rated power in Watts and VoltAmpere.
Quality Assurance
1.
The luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturer
quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two
types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2)
26 5600 - 7
June 16, 2016
production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall
include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum
performance levels of the modules built to meet this specification. These
tests shall include: CCT, CRI, lumen output, and wattage. Test shall be
recorded, analyzed and maintained for future reference.
J.
2.
QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a
minimum period of seven years.
3.
LED luminaire designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the
production quality assurance testing performance requirements described
below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this
specification.
Design Qualification Testing
1.
Design Qualification Testing shall be performed by a National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) testing facility. Such testing
may be performed by the manufacturer or an independent testing lab
hired by the manufacturer on new luminaire designs and when a major
design change has been implemented on an existing design. A major
design change is defined as a design change (electrical or physical),
which changes any of the performance characteristic of the luminaire,
results in a different circuit configuration for the power supply, or changes
the layout of the individual LEDs in the module.
2.
A quantity of two units for each design shall be submitted for Design
Qualification Testing.
3.
Product submittals shall be accompanied by product specification sheets
or other documentation that includes the designed parameters as detailed
in this specification. These parameters include (but are not limited to):
a.
b.
4.
K.
Luminaire shall be tested per IESNA LM 79-08.
WARRANTY
1.
2.6
Maximum power in Watts.
L80 in hours, when extrapolated for the worse case operating
temperature (section 2.2.3). TM21 report shall be submitted to
demonstrate this.
The manufacturer shall provide a single source, 5 year limited warranty
against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for
all components of the luminaire. Warranty is from the time of acceptance
of the luminaires. All warranty documentation shall be provided to
customer prior to the first shipment.
POLES AND STANDARDS:
26 5600 - 8
June 16, 2016
A.
Pole manufacturer shall coordinate with luminaire manufacturer to ensure
adequate strength to support the fixtures specified. Pole shall be furnished with
all appropriate mounting hardware, fasteners and supports for installation of the
luminaire(s).
B.
All pole hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel or other corrosionresistant materials if stainless steel is not compatible with structural material.
C.
Pole manufacturer shall provide a plywood or steel anchor-bolt template to assist
installer in preparing pole foundation.
Template shall indicate luminaire
orientation to ensure proper light distribution.
D.
All poles shall be provided with a wiring handhole per National Electrical Code
requirements.
E.
All poles shall be provided with grounding lug bonded to metal components of the
pole. The lug shall be accessible through the handhole.
F.
All poles shall be furnished with anchor bolt/base plate covers.
match pole match pole material and finish.
G.
Steel poles shall be pre-finished inside and out, either hot-dip galvanized or
prime-coat enamel to prevent corrosion.
Cover shall
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Exterior pole-mounted luminaire with anchor base type poles shall be installed on
a reinforced concrete foundation designed to withstand fixture weight and
prevailing wind conditions. Conduit raceway shall be pre-set in the foundation
and terminate inside the pole.
B.
Provide a copper-clad steel grounding rod, installed and bonded at each lighting
pole.
C.
All poles shall be installed so that the pole is plumb to the earth, with the bottom
of the base flush to the foundation, paving, or finished grade, unless indicated
otherwise. Verify soil conditions at each pole location to ensure adequacy of soil
to support pole. Advise Engineer if soil conditions are not adequate.
D.
All pole-mounted luminaires shall have in-line fuse installed at the hand hole of
the pole with weatherproof fuse holder. Provide sufficient slack in conductors to
allow servicing outside of pole.
E.
Reflectors, trim cones, and other visible trim of luminaires shall not be installed
until completion of work, and shall be clean and free of dust, fingerprints,
scratches, dents etc. upon substantial completion.
26 5600 - 9
June 16, 2016
SPECIFICATION INDEX
BJCC PREMIER PARKING LOT P13 ENHANCEMENT
311000 – SITE CLEARING
312000 – EARTH MOVING
321216 – ASPHALT PAVING
321313 – CONCRETE PAVING
331116 – WATER UTILITY
334100 – STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
Civil Engineering Spec Index
May 16, 2016
SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2.
Removing existing vegetation.
3.
Clearing and grubbing.
4.
Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5.
Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities.
7.
Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise
remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and
shall be removed from Project site.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1.02
A. Record Drawings: Indentifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and
other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions and said property
and affected adjoining properties.
1.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
Owner's premises (Refer to Architect for Details).
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located
before site clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentationcontrol and any plant protection measures are in place.
E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1.
2.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
Parking vehicles or equipment.
3.
Foot traffic.
4.
Erection of sheds or structures.
5.
6.
Impoundment of water.
Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
311000 - 1
May 16, 2016
7.
Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving".
1.
Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2.01
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be
relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.
3.02
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
Owner.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control measures shown on the
Drawings and the requirements of the Alabama Department of Environmental
Management (ADEM).
Construction Exit Pads (CEPs), perimeter sediment barriers, inlet protection,
Sedimentation Basins (SBNs), and/or temporary sediment traps with a minimum
volume of 67 Cubic Yards per acre of disturbed area shall be considered the minimum
items required.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by
construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
3.03
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in
Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" if provided by the Landscape
Architect.
B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by
Architect.
3.04
EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or
abandoned in place.
311000 - 2
May 16, 2016
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities and as required to
perform the work.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed
utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable
fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and
security and utilities sections and Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and
Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition."
D. Contractor shall coordinate all work within 25' of overhead and underground power
lines with Alabama Power prior to performing any work. The Contractor shall also
coordinate all crane and boom truck work Alabama Power. The Contractor shall
comply with all Alabama Power and OSHA safety clearance regulations for power
lines.
3.05
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 36
inches below finished subgrade or depth of undercut, whichever is deeper.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.
B. All existing structures (including above and below ground construction) within the
project area shall be removed. Removal shall include any foundations, existing paving
larger than 4" in any direction, building materials, underground pipes and lines, etc.
C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil
material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches,
and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.06 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil from areas to be graded in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials. A depth of approximately 5 inches was
indicated by the geotechnical report.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Surround with silt fencing in order
to prevent erosion from carrying sediment downstream. If necessary cover to prevent
windblown dust. Provide temporary seeding and mulching for all stockpiles if stockpile
is planned to remain for a period of 13 days or more. If necessary cover to prevent
windblown dust.
311000 - 3
May 16, 2016
3.07
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to
facilitate new construction. This includes slabs, pavements, footings, debris, rubbish,
building material remnants, manmade material, tanks, etc.
3.08
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property, or waste at a suitable location on-site with Owner’s written approval.
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport
them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION 311000
311000 - 4
May 16, 2016
SECTION 312000
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Geotechnical Report by Building and Earth Sciences dated October 8, 2015. All other
geotechnical findings and reports by Building and Earth specifically for this project.
Copies shall be obtained from the Architect or directly from Building and Earth.
1.02
SUMMARY
1.03
1.
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses,
and plants.
2.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3.
4.
Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5.
Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
6.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including
haunches to support sides of pipe.
2.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix
asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench
before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes
upward capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines
and dimensions indicated.
1.
2.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or
beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized
additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without
additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
312000 - 1
May 16, 2016
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for
hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a
cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as
underground services within buildings.
1.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located
before beginning earth moving operations.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
C. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures and erosion
and sediment control measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are
not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification [Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM
according to ASTM D 2487] [Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to
AASHTO M 145], or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 4
inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other
deleterious matter, and as recommended in the geotechnical report. Also the soils
must meet the following criteria:
1. Liquid Limit: less than 50
2. Plasticity Index: less than 25
3. Maximum Dry Density: Greater than 100 pcf
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification [Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH,
and PT according to ASTM D 2487] [Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7
according to AASHTO M 145], or a combination of these groups, as well as alluvial
soils and organic soils, and as recommended in the geotechnical report.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent
of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
312000 - 2
May 16, 2016
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent
passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured
for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local
practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches
wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with
metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by
metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local
practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Red: Electric
2.
3.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials
Orange: Telephone and other communications
4.
Blue: Water systems
5.
Green: Sanitary sewer
C. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage
geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following
minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard
test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf); ASTM D 4632.
2.
Tear Strength: 40 lbf); ASTM D 4533.
3.
Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf); ASTM D 4833.
4.
Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft.); ASTM D 4491.
5.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 50); ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earth moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving
operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
312000 - 3
May 16, 2016
3.02
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character
of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials
may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil
materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.03
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1
inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing
and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for
inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1.
2.
3.04
Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.
Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear,
or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or
pulls roots.
Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary
Tree and Plant Protection."
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,
elevations, and subgrades.
3.05
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of
pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches
higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove
projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material, 4 inches deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding
course, or as required by the utility or regulatory agencies.
D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.
Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear,
or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or
pulls roots.
2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities.
312000 - 4
May 16, 2016
3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary
Tree and Plant Protection."
3.06
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements and as recommended by
the geotechnical / materials testing firm, with a loaded pneumatic-tired dump truck to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated
water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional
compensation.
3.07
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom
elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top
elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be
used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as
directed by Architect.
3.08 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip
line of remaining trees.
3.09
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape
bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and
for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18
inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of
bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section.
D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for
piping or conduit less than 12 inches below the subgrade surface of roadways. After
installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of
concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified
in Division 3 Section
E. Place and compact initial backfill as indicated on plans, free of particles larger than 1
inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on
both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6
inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
312000 - 5
May 16, 2016
3.10 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal
so fill material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer
before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material
that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to
specified dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required
elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages for Standard Proctor
density according to ASTM D 698:
1.
Under structures, walls, and stairs, compact soils to a minimum of 98 percent of
the Standard Proctor maximum dry density.
2.
3.
4.
Under walkways and sidewalks, and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil
material at 95 percent.
Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.
For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at
98 percent with pneumatic-piston tampers.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and
elevations indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2.
Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
312000 - 6
May 16, 2016
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested
with a 10-foot straightedge.
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and
walks as follows:
1.
Shape subbase course[ and base course] to required crown elevations and
cross-slope grades.
2.
3.
Place subbase course[ and base course] that exceeds 6 inches in compacted
thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6
inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
Compact subbase course [and base course] within +/-2% optimum moisture
content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than
98 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698.
3.14A PREPARATION OF SOILS IN TURF GRASS AREAS
A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches.
Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
Test soil to be used as topsoil. Amend according to test recommendations.
2.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet
finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting
soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.Retain
first paragraph below if surface soils are amended in place and reused.
B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by
excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as
follows:
1.
Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
2.
Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and
fertilizers according to soil sample test recommendations and mix thoroughly into
top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.
a.
Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.
3.
Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and
other extraneous matter.
4.
Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off
Owner's property.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place
concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:
1.
Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick.
312000 - 7
May 16, 2016
2.
Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and
thicknesses to not less than 98 percent Modified Proctor maximum dry density
according to ASTM D 1557.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer.
Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed
work comply with requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be
performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of
other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested
subgrade when approved by Architect.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved
degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace
soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is
obtained.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due
to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
3.19 COMPLY WITH GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
A. All work must comply with the geotechnical report and the geotechnical engineer's
guidelines and recommendations. If there is a conflict between the specifications and
the geotechnical report, the geotechnical report will govern.
312000 - 8
May 16, 2016
Specification Index:
32840
Performance Irrigation
32930
Landscape Work
June 16, 2016
SECTION 32840
PERFORMANCE IRRIGATION
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
WORK INCLUDED: Design and installation of underground sprinkler system based on
these specifications and as required for complete coverage of designated landscaped
areas. Work includes, but is not limited to:
1.
Landscape sprinkler system.
Tap, meter, backflow prevention
2.
Automatic controller, remote valves and wiring.
4.
Responsibility for full and complete coverage of all planted areas, including
necessary adjustments during installation, maintenance and warranty periods at
no additional cost.
5.
Specified maintenance and warranty period.
1.02
RELATED WORK:
A.
Landscape Work - Section 02800
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
CODES AND STANDARDS: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the latest rules of the National Electric Code for all electrical
work and materials.
B.
QUALIFICATIONS OF SUBCONTRACTOR: Subcontract the work of this Section to a
single firm specializing in irrigation work. Irrigation work shall be a subcontract to the
Landscape Work.
C.
QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLERS: Provide at least one person who shall be present
at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly
familiar with the type of materials being installed and the materials manufacturer's
recommended methods of installation, and who shall direct all Work performed under
this Section.
D.
MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: Provide underground sprinkler system as a
complete unit produced by a single acceptable manufacturer, including heads, valves,
piping circuits, controls, and accessories.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
SUBMIT THE FOLLOWING
1.
PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation
instructions for underground sprinkler system. Use only current model parts and
accessories.
2.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for landscape irrigation system
32840 - 1
June 16, 2016
3.
including plan layout and details illustrating location and type of heads, valves,
piping circuits, connections, controls, and accessories.
AS BUILT DRAWINGS: Provide separate and complete Project Record
Drawings prepared in accordance with the provisions of Division 1 Series of
these Specifications.
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
UTILITIES: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a
manner which will avoid all possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.
Repair damage to utility owner's satisfaction at no additional cost.
B.
SITE INSPECTION: Examine conditions under which Work is to be performed and
notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not perform Work until
conditions are satisfactory and acceptable.
C.
PROTECTION: Protect the Work and the general public.
1.06
WARRANTY
A.
WARRANTY: Irrigation Work to be free from defects in materials and workmanship
which may cause damage to the site or other materials and work, or which fail to
perform as specified.
B.
WARRANTY PERIOD: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
During the period of the Warranty, perform the necessary repairs or replacements to
correct the defective materials or workmanship.
D.
WARRANTY includes the responsibility for removing and replacing other work as
necessary to accomplish repairs or replacements, and responsibility for the cost of
replacing plants or other materials damaged by defective materials or workmanship.
PART 2. - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following:
1.
Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.
2.
The TORO Company, Irrigation Division.
B.
PIPE: PVC plastic pipe, ASTM D-1785, Schedule 40, for sleeves and mainline.
C.
PIPE FITTINGS: For PVC plastic pipe, ASTM D 2466 socket fittings with ASTM D 2564
solvent cement. Use only heavy duty solvent cement.
D.
VALVES: Manufacturer's standard, of type and size indicated, and as follows. Furnish
cast bronze bodies, unless otherwise indicated.
32840 - 2
June 16, 2016
1.
2.
MANUAL STATION VALVES: Globe valves.
KEY OPERATED VALVES: Manual valves, fitted for key operation. Furnish 3
valve keys.
3.
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT VALVES: Globe valves operated by low power solenoid,
normally open manual flow adjustment.
4.
AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES: Designed to open for drainage when
line
pressure drops below 3 psi.
E.
BACKFLOW PREVENTER: Watts Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly per required size
or approved equal.
F.
BACKFLOW PREVENTER ENCLOSURE: WattsBox Insulated Enclosure per required
size or approved equal.
G.
PRESSURE REGULATOR: Wilkins or approved equal.
H.
WATER METER: Provide separate water meter for irrigation system sized as per
manufacturer's recommendation.
I.
SPRINKLER HEADS: Manufacturer's standard unit designed to provide uniform
coverage over entire area of spray at available water pressure, as follows:
1.
FLUSH SURFACE: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.
2.
POP-UP SPRAY: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless
steel retraction spring.
3.
SHRUBBERY: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.
4.
POP-UP ROTARY SPRAY: Gear drive, full circle and adjustable part circle type.
J.
HEAVY DUTY VALVE BOX AND COVER: Ametek or approved equal.
2.02
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
GENERAL: Furnish low voltage system manufactured expressly for control of automatic
circuit valves of underground sprinkler systems. Provide unit of capacity to suit number
of stations as indicated.
B.
EXTERIOR CONTROL ENCLOSURE: Manufacturer’s standard weatherproof enclosure
with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code).
C.
TRANSFORMER: To convert building service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts.
D.
STATION CONTROL: Each station variable from approximately 5 to 60 minute. Include
switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit.
E.
TIMING DEVICE: Adjustable, 24-hour and 7 or 14 day clocks to operate any time of day
and skip any day in a 7 or 14 day period. Allow for manual or semi-automatic operation
without disturbing preset automatic operation.
PART 3. - EXECUTION
3.01
SYSTEM DESIGN
32840 - 3
June 16, 2016
A.
DESIGN PRESSURES: Indicate on Shop Drawings, minimum pressure at last head in
circuit.
B.
LOCATION OF HEADS: Lay out heads to achieve complete and uninterrupted
coverage and minimum water wasted by overthrow on pavement.
C.
ZONES: Shrub and groundcover planting areas must be on separate zones from sod
and seeded planting areas.
3.02
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A.
GENERAL: Excavate straight and true with bottom uniformly sloped to low points.
Protect existing or previously installed lawns and plantings. Remove and replant as
necessary to complete installation. Replace damaged plants with new to match existing.
B.
TRENCH DEPTH: Excavate trenches to a depth of 3" below invert of pipe, unless
otherwise indicated
C.
MINIMUM COVER: Provide 30" minimum cover for pressure pipe and 24" minimum
cover for non-pressure pipe within city R.O.W. Provide 18" minimum cover for pressure
pipe and 12" minimum cover for non-pressure pipe outside of city R.O.W.
D.
BACKFILL: Backfill with clean material from excavation. Remove organic material as
well as rocks and debris larger than 1" diameter. Place acceptable backfill material in 6"
layers, compacting each layer.
E.
PAVEMENTS: Where existing pavements must be cut to install landscape irrigation
system, cut smoothly to straight lines 6" wider than trench. Receive Architect's approval
prior to cutting any walks. Wherever possible, bore under paved areas. Excavate
trench to required depth and width. Trench depth shall be a minimum equal to depth of
location of project. Remove cut-out pavement and excavated material from the site.
Replace pavement cuts with equal materials and finishes.
F.
SLEEVING: Provide schedule 40 PVC Sleeving for all piping under paving.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
GENERAL: Comply with requirements of the Standard Plumbing Code and all local
codes and ordinances.
B.
CONNECTION TO MAIN: Determine mainline location. Connect to existing mainline in
such a manner as to reduce wasted pipe. Install new valve and union.
C.
Maintain uninterrupted water service to building during normal working hours.
Coordinate temporary water shut-off with Owner.
D.
BACKFLOW PREVENTER: Install according to standard plumbing code and all local
codes and regulations.
32840 - 4
June 16, 2016
E.
STATION VALVES: Install in valve box, arrange for easy adjustment and removal.
Provide union on downstream side. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate
of rated operating pressure required for sprinkler circuit. Install valves no deeper than
18" below finished grade
F.
SLEEVES: Coordinate installation of sleeves under paved areas with other portions of
the work.
G.
PIPING:
1.
Lay pipe on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.
2.
At wall penetrations, pack the opening around pipe with non-shrink grout. At
exterior face, leave a perimeter slot approximately 1/2" wide by 3/4" deep. Fill
this slot with backer rod and an acceptable elastomeric sealant. Repair below
grade waterproofing disturbed by this work and make penetration watertight.
3.
Install PVC pipe in dry weather when temperature is above 40 F in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow joints to cure at least 24
hours at temperatures above 40 F before testing, unless recommended by
manufacturer.
H.
SPRINKLER HEADS: Flush station lines with full head of water and install heads after
hydrostatic test is completed.
1.
Install heads at height indicated or as instructed by Architect.
2.
Locate part-circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4" from walls and 2"
from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
DIELECTRIC PROTECTION: Use dielectric fittings at connection where pipes of
dissimilar metal are jointed.
3.04
TESTING
A.
GENERAL: Notify Architect in writing when testing will be conducted. Conduct tests in
presence of Architect.
B.
HYDROSTATIC TEST: Test water piping and valves, before backfilling trenches, to a
hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi. Piping may be tested in sections to
expedite work. Remove and repair or replace piping, connections, valves which do not
pass hydrostatic testing.
C.
OPERATIONAL TESTING: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic is in place, and
sprinkler heads adjusted to final position. Demonstrate to Architect that system meets
coverage requirements and that automatic controls function properly. Coverage
requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time.
D.
After completion of grading and planting, carefully adjust sprinkler heads locations and
heights so they will furnish complete coverage.
3.05
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain the Work of this Section from the commencement of the work until thirty days
past the date of Substantial Completion.
32840 - 5
June 16, 2016
B.
Coordinate with Owner for maintenance schedules, staging and practices.
C.
Maintain and operate the irrigation system during the Maintenance Period.
D.
Monitor the system and adjust controller to correspond to climate, season, site and
weather conditions.
E.
Service system as required to remedy malfunctions and as necessary for preventive
maintenance
F.
Check and clean heads of debris so that they provide uniform water distribution at all
times.
G.
Raise and/or lower heads as necessary.
H.
Clean-up litter resulting from maintenance operations.
I.
Clean-up and repair damage caused by leaking water, broken pipes or other failure.
J.
If system is not functioning satisfactorily, hand water as necessary.
K.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance.
32840 - 6
June 16, 2016
SECTION 32930
LANDSCAPE WORK
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary and
General Requirements apply to the work specified herein.
B.
Section 32.8400, Performance Irrigation.
1.2
A.
DESCRIPTION
Provide all labor, equipment, materials and services necessary to complete the Work of
this Section, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Providing, placing, grading topsoil for landscape grading as indicated in the
Drawings.
Providing and installing trees, shrubs, and solid sod for landscape planting.
Maintenance 30 days beyond Substantial Completion, and One Year Warranty
Period.
Note: Installation of automatic irrigation system shall be a subcontract to
Landscape Work. Refer to Section 32.8400, Performance Irrigation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data for firms specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include a list of a minimum of five similar projects
completed within the last five years with project name, address, names of Architects
and Owners, overall description of scope of work, and contract value.
B.
Materials Lists:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Within ten (10) days of award of Contract, submit a complete list of materials and
unit prices demonstrating proposed source, availability, and complete
conformance with requirements specified.
Submit to Landscape Architect within thirty (30) days from date contract is
awarded to General Contractor confirmed orders for materials from approved
nurseries (listed on plant schedule and/or drawings). Contractor is responsible
for payment of deposits required by approved nurseries.
For plant material not specified as pre-selected and tagged, submit color
photographs of representative plants with materials unit price list.
Substitutions not permitted unless proof is submitted to the Landscape
Architect's satisfaction that the material is unavailable as specified.
C.
Certificates: Deliver all certificates of inspection to the Landscape Architect.
D.
Product Data:
32930 - 1
June 16, 2016
1.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Submit manufacturer's product literature, instructions and guaranteed analysis
for fertilizer.
Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and solid sod are plant materials listed in Plant
Schedule on Drawings.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Coordinate the Work of this Section with that of other trades.
B.
Examine conditions under which Work is to be performed and notify Landscape Architect
in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.
C.
Do not perform Work until conditions are satisfactory and acceptable.
D.
Determine locations of underground utilities and perform Work in a manner which will
avoid all possible damage. Hand excavate as required.
E.
Maintain stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Applicable Sections of Alabama Highway Department (AHD) Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition.
All plant materials to comply with State and Federal laws relating to inspection for
disease and insect control.
Plant material quality to conform to American Standard for Nursery Stock,
American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., latest edition, ANSI Z-60.1.
Plant Material nomenclature to conform to:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Hortus Third, a Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivated in the United
States and Canada, MacMillan Publishing Company, Inc., New York, latest
edition.
Names not listed in the above standard to comply with those most
commonly used in the trade.
In all cases, botanical names take precedence over common names.
Installer Qualifications: Firm experienced in the successful installation of a minimum of
five projects within the past five years similar in scope, quality, and contract value to
that indicated for this project. Firm shall have sufficient manpower, equipment and
financial resources to complete the Work of this Section. At a minimum, firms shall
show evidence of the following qualifications:
1.
Alabama General Contractor’s License for Specialty Construction, with
subclassification S-4 Landscaping, with a minimum bid limit of E - $500,000.00.
32930 - 2
June 16, 2016
2.
3.
5 years experience in commercial or institutional landscape installation projects
operating as the same company.
A minimum of 5 projects completed in the last 5 years with a contract value
exceeding $100,000.00. Include project location, date of completion, contract
value, detailed description of work, name, address and phone number of project
reference. Project work examples should include the following:
a.
b.
c.
Landscape installation work
Landscape maintenance work
Irrigation installation work
D.
Personnel: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in the
Work and familiar with requirements and methods needed for performance of the
Work. At all times during planting operations, have on the site a person
knowledgeable in horticultural practices as a superintendent.
E.
Review:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
All plant material is subject to review in the field or nursery before digging, by the
Landscape Architect.
All plant materials and other materials are subject to review at the site before
planting or placing, or at any other time.
Attach secure, durable, legible waterproof labels, stating correct botanical and
common names as specified, to at least one plant, bundle or container of each
plant variety.
Immediately remove from site plant materials or other materials not complying
with specified requirements.
Review is for visual qualities only and does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to provide materials and workmanship in full compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original containers showing weight,
analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during
delivery, and while stored at the site.
B.
Deliver all non-packaged or non-containerized materials to site in a manner that will
prevent loss, damage, deterioration or contamination.
C.
Store all materials in approved locations to prevent loss, damage, deterioration or
contamination.
D.
Delivery, storage and handling of all plant materials shall conform to AHD Specification
Section 860.06(c) and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Deliver freshly dug plants, which have not been in cold storage or heeled-in.
Do not prune prior to delivery.
Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break
branches or destroy natural shape.
Provide protective covering during delivery.
32930 - 3
June 16, 2016
5.
1.8
Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed and approved,
and plant immediately.
SITE MAINTENANCE
A.
Keep roads, paving and structures adjacent to planting operations clean and free of
obstructions, mud and debris at all times.
B.
Do not permit flushing of roads or disposal of dirt or debris into sewers or drainage
ditches.
C.
Control dust from planting operations.
PART 2. - PRODCUTS
2.1
A.
SOIL MATERIALS
Topsoil:
1.
2.
3.
This Contractor shall furnish topsoil in sufficient quantity, to complete grading and
planting operations as specified.
Assume that stockpiled topsoil will not be available from site. Contractor shall
furnish topsoil necessary to complete the Landscape Work.
Characteristics of all topsoil to be furnished at on-grade locations: (Note: Soil mix
for roof deck gardens is specified by others)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Fertile, friable naturally occurring topsoil (from wooded area; topsoil from
open fields will not be accepted), free of stones, clay lumps, hardpan, roots,
stumps, branches, sticks and other debris larger than one and one-half
inches in any dimension; free of noxious weeds, grasses, seeds, plants,
extraneous matter and any substance harmful to plant growth.
pH 5.0 to 7.0
Organic matter 5% to 10%
Sand 50% to 70%
Silt less than 30%
Clay 10% to 25%
Permeability Rate of 5 X 10-3 centimeters or greater at 85% compaction.
B.
Notify Landscape Architect of location of proposed topsoil for his review before testing or
transporting to site.
C.
Topsoil testing for furnished topsoil:
Sample and test, minimum of three samples, for compliance with specified
characteristics. Soil test must include particle analysis. Tests to be performed by soil
testing lab reviewed in advance by Landscape Architect, by this Contractor at his
expense. Submit Soil Test Reports to Landscape Architect for review before
transporting topsoil. Amend per recommendations of Soil Test Report and as
recommended to meet specified characteristics.
32930 - 4
June 16, 2016
2.2
A.
SOIL AMENDMENTS
Mychorrhizal Transplant Inoculent:
1.
Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
B.
Mycor Tree Saver by
Plant Health Care, Inc.
Pittsburgh, PA
(800) 421-9051
Southeast: (770) 516-8073.
Approved equal.
Granular Fertilizer:
1.
Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Uniform in composition.
Dry and free-flowing.
Commercially available.
Conforming to State and Federal fertilizer laws.
Of the formulation recommended in the Soil Test Report as specified.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Containing endo (VAM -- min. 1000 spores per 3 oz.) and ecto (Pt -- min.
60 million spores per 3 oz.) mychorrizal fungi, hydrogels, natural humates,
yucca plant extract, and kelp meal.
Conforming to State and Federal laws.
Sta-Green Plant Food Co., Nursery Special, 12-6-6.
The Scotts Company, Scott's.
Approved equal.
Slow-release Fertilizer:
1.
Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Resin-coated, homogenous or heterogeneous controlled release fertilizer
for ornamental plants.
Chemical components (14-14-14): Ammonium nitrate, ammonium
phosphate, calcium phosphate, and potassium sulfate.
a.
b.
c.
The Scotts Company: Osmocote.
Sta-Green Plant Food Co.: Polyon.
Approved equal.
32930 - 5
June 16, 2016
D.
Plant nutrient solution:
1.
Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
E.
A.
a.
Asset RTU by
Helena Chemical Company
Memphis, TN 38119
b.
Approved equal.
Lime:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Water based nutrient solution for soil application on newly installed trees.
Chemical analysis (6-20-5):
Total Nitrogen (N)
6.00%
Available Phosphoric Acid (P203)
20.00%
Soluble Potash (K2O)
5.00%
Iron (Fe)
.10%
.10% Iron (Fe) Chelated
Zinc (Zn)
.05%
.05% Zinc (Zn) Chelated
Manganese (Mn)
.05%
.05% Manganese (Mn) Chelated
Boron (B)
.02%
Copper (Cu)
.05%
Molybdenum (Mo)
.0005%
Ground or crushed agricultural lime.
Containing not less than 85% of total carbonates.
90% passing 10-mesh screen.
Not less than 25% passing a 100-mesh screen.
Dry and free-flowing.
Apply at rate specified in Soil Test Report.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING MATERIALS
Water:
1.
2.
Provide fresh water, free of impurities or any substance harmful to plant growth.
Provide all hose, attachments, and accessories necessary to complete the Work
as specified.
B.
Topsoil: Refer to paragraph 2.1.A, this Section, for specified topsoil for use in all planting
operations.
C.
Topsoil Mix:
1.
Prepare all topsoil mix used at on-grade tree and shrub pits and ground cover
beds in the following proportions:
32930 - 6
June 16, 2016
2.
4 parts by volume topsoil as specified
2 parts by volume decomposed organic matter
2 parts by volume sand
Add 6 lbs. 14-14-14 Osmocote to each cubic yard of topsoil mix during mixing
process, for all plants.
D.
Sand: Fine aggregate meeting ASTM C-144; free of substances harmful to plant growth.
E.
Decomposed Organic Matter:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Well rotted organic matter.
Containing no weeds, grasses, plants or their seeds nor any substance harmful
to plant growth.
Of uniform composition.
a.
b.
c.
F.
Klumb Company, "Soil Conditioner".
Pioneer Southern, Inc.
Approved equal.
Mulch:
1.
100% Shredded Pine Bark (tree, plant and groundcover pits and beds):
a.
b.
Free from wood, wood shavings, cambium, sawdust, leaves, twigs,
insects, grasses, weeds, plants and their seeds, other foreign material, and
any substance harmful to plant growth.
(1)
(2)
2.
Klumb Company, Shredded Mulch.
Approved equal.
Pinestraw (pine tree plantings):
Free from leaves, twigs, insects, grasses, weeds, plants and their seeds, other
foreign materials, and any substances harmful to plant growth.
G. Solid Sod:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Obtain solid sod from sources having growing conditions similar to the area to be
planted.
Sod shall be true to name and type of the species named in the Plant Schedule.
Sod shall contain no more than 5% other grasses.
Sod shall be well cultivated and weed, disease and insect-free, of good texture,
and free from extraneous roots, stones and other foreign material. The presence
of nutgrass or other weeds shall be cause for rejection and replacement prior to
Substantial Completion, or during the Warranty Period.
Plant Material:
1.
Definition: Trees and shrubs listed in the Plant Schedule in the Drawings.
2.
General:
a.
Species, sizes, manner in which to be planted, and approximate
32930 - 7
June 16, 2016
b.
3.
Quality:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Conform to the standards set forth in American Standard for Nursery
Stock.
Standard quality and first-class representatives of their species or variety
and true to name and type.
Nursery-grown, unless specified otherwise.
In compliance with State and Federal laws relating to disease and insect
infestation; file certificates with Landscape Architect.
Having normal, well developed branches and vigorous root systems, free
from defects, decay, disfigurements, sun scald, bark abrasions, plant
diseases, insect pests or eggs, borers and any and all infestations.
Plant material will be rejected for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
5.
quantities to complete the planting as indicated are included in the Plant
Schedule.
Scientific and common plant names conform to those given in Hortus
Third, or are those generally accepted in the nursery trade.
Lack of compactness or proper proportion;
Weak, thin growth in rows too close together;
Cut back from larger stock to meet specified requirements;
Undersized, dry, cracked or broken balls, or plants that are loose in their
ball;
Any balled & burlapped material not root-pruned within the last two years;
Root bound within container or ball;
Lacking proper proportion as to height and spread and specified
characteristics or plant material;
Not acceptable to Landscape Architect; or Owner
Size:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Sizes and proportions of all plant materials shall equal those
recommended by the American Standard for Nursery Stock for specified
grades.
Measure plants before pruning and with branches in normal position.
Equal or exceed measurements specified in Plant Schedule, which are
the minimum acceptable; provide 50% of plant material maximum size
specified.
Height and spread dimensions: General body mass of plant, not from
branch tip to tip.
Well-proportioned as to height; reject plants which meet specified
measurements but do not possess an overall balance.
Take caliper measurements on trunk 6 inches above natural ground level
up to and including 4-inch caliper size; 12 inches above natural ground for
larger sizes.
B&B plants shall have firm natural balls of a diameter and depth not less
than that recommended in American Standard For Nursery Stock.
Container-grown plants: Conform to standards set forth in American
Standard For Nursery Stock for container-grown plants.
32930 - 8
June 16, 2016
6.
I.
Guying and Staking Materials:
1.
Wood Stakes:
a.
Pressure-treated Southern Yellow Pine, or other approved wood, 2" X 4"
X length specified in the Drawings, pointed at one end.
b.
Above-ground portion painted black.
c.
Free from insects and fungi.
2.
3.
4.
Wire: Pliable #10 or #12 gauge galvanized steel wire, doubled and twisted.
Turnbuckles: As detailed by Landscape Architect.
Protective Hose:
a.
b.
c.
d.
J.
Quantity: Furnish plants in sufficient quantity to satisfy the intent of the
Drawings and Specifications. Locate in sufficient quantity so that time is
not lost if some plants are rejected.
Reinforced fibre-bearing rubber hose.
Black in color.
May be second-hand.
Not less than 1/2" inside diameter.
Tree Pit Drainage Materials:
1.
2.
Washed, crushed No. 57 limestone for drainage fill.
Filter Fabric:
3.
a.
Acceptable product(s): #4550.
b.
Manufacturer: Amoco Fabrics and Fibers Co.
c.
Or equal.
Siphon tube: Four-inch (4") PVC pipe and cap, length indicated on drawings,
painted black on exposed end
Drainage Tube: Four-inch (4") diameter perforated drainage pipe as indicated on
the Drawings.
4.
PART 3. - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Planting Season:
1.
2.
B.
A period of acceptable weather conditions, during seasons in which satisfactory
results can be expected as determined by acceptable practice in the locality and
approved by the Landscape Architect.
Commence planting operations as soon as portions of the site are available, as
reviewed by the Landscape Architect.
Site Inspection:
1.
2.
Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to take place.
Inform Landscape Architect in writing, prior to planting, of conditions existing
which could be considered detrimental to the successful planting and growth of
32930 - 9
June 16, 2016
any plant material, including but not limited to, subsurface drainage conditions,
utility locations, subgrade compaction, percolation rate and elevations.
C.
Site Preparation:
1.
Subgrade will be established by others at four (4) inches below finished grade in
all areas.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Topsoil berming, if required, is by this Contractor.
Topsoil depth for shrub and groundcover beds is six (6) inches (unless
otherwise specified) and is by this Contractor. Do not place or spread
topsoil in an area until subgrade is reviewed by Landscape Architect and is
acceptable to this Contractor.
Remove all vegetative growth from topsoil by approved means before
commencing with planting operations.
Remove all unwanted vegetative growth from areas designated to receive new
planting or sod with chemical herbicide or by other approved means, prior to
scarifying and placing topsoil.
Scarify subsoil for a depth of 4" before spreading topsoil.
Place and spread approved topsoil to specified finished grades (depth of 4") in all
areas to receive sodding, unless greater depth is indicated.
Remove extraneous matter measuring 1-1/2" or larger in any dimension from top
four inches (4") of placed topsoil.
Uniformly grade areas including adjacent transition areas to line and grade
shown on Drawings.
Obtain approval of finished grades before proceeding with planting operations;
eliminate irregularities and ponding.
Protect stockpiled or spread topsoil from erosion by force of wind, water, or other
force; re-establish eroded, rutted or settled grades to proper finished grade.
D.
Topsoil Mix:
1.
Prepare topsoil mix to specification 2.3.C off site, using approved topsoil.
2.
Obtain approval of topsoil mix before delivery to site, and prior to commencing
planting operations. Do not mix in place with placed topsoil.
3.
Place topsoil mix as backfill for tree and shrub pits and beds as drawn. Place six
(6) inches of topsoil mix in all shrub beds unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
4.
Raised seatwall planter at plaza and planting islands in the stream bed require
greater depth of topsoil mix. Refer to drawings for specified depth of topsoil mix
in these areas.
5.
Protect stockpiled topsoil mix from erosion by force of wind or water, or damage
by traffic.
E.
Plant Location Staking:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stake plant locations and areas for review prior to planting.
Do not dig plant pits prior to obtaining Landscape Architect's review of plant
locations.
Make adjustments in plant locations as recommended.
If underground obstructions are encountered in planting areas that would prevent
32930 - 10
June 16, 2016
the installation of the plant material, contact the Landscape Architect
immediately. Alternate locations may be selected by the Landscape Architect at
no additional cost to the Owner.
F.
Planting:
1.
Place plants comprising a planting composition in reviewed staked locations for
review by Landscape Architect.
2.
Plant pits and beds:
a.
Drainage:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
b.
Set plants uniformly 2" to 4" higher than surrounding grade or as
necessary to provide adequate positive drainage away from roots. Slope
soil gradually from saucer.
Cut rope, wire or string from top of ball after plant has been set; turn down
and bury burlap.
Backfilling plants:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Pits are generally circular in outline with vertical sides.
Tree pits: 4' greater in diameter than ball or root spread.
Shrub pits: 1' greater in diameter than ball or root spread.
Excavate to specified dimensions and dispose of excavated material off
site.
Prepare as specified in detail Drawings.
Setting plants:
a.
4.
This Contractor is responsible for achieving and maintaining
adequate drainage from all plant pits and beds. Use specified
drainage system, or other approved means, in all tree pits (except
Pines).
Drainage Tube: Four-inch (4") diameter perforated drainage pipe
as indicated on the Drawings. Slope pipe a minimum of one-half inch
(1/2") per foot to the point of nearest relief. At point of relief, cover end
of drainage pipe with a minimum of six inches (6") of sand in addition
to mulch, sod or seeding.
48 hours prior to planting, test each plant pit for adequate
drainage.
Owner reserves the right to test tree or plant pits at any time,
before or after planting, for adequate drainage. Correct immediately
any inadequate drainage encountered.
Backfill to 2/3 full with specified topsoil mix.
Water thoroughly to eliminate air pockets and settling before filling to
grade.
Form shallow saucer at plant pit edge to hold water.
Water in thoroughly.
Mychorrizal transplant inoculant:
32930 - 11
June 16, 2016
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
Staking:
a.
b.
7.
c.
9.
Do not prune plants without prior review with the Landscape Architect.
Prune after plants are in place and ONLY as the Landscape Architect
recommends.
Main leaders of trees to remain intact.
Finished Grading: Handgrade and rake planting areas so that grades conform to
surrounding areas and surface water drains freely.
Mulching:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation; take
corrective measure.
Immediately after planting, stake trees as detailed.
Pruning:
a.
b.
8.
Place tree or shrub in planting hole and backfill soil 3" to 4" from top of
root ball.
Evenly spread contents of mychorrhizal inoculant packet(s) in a ring up to
8" wide around outside edge of rootball.
Backfill remaining soil mix and thoroughly mix area containing mychorrizal
inoculant around root ball, 8" wide to 8" deep. Pack firmly.
Form shallow saucer at plant pit edge to hold water.
Water thoroughly to eliminate air pockets.
Water to soil saturation.
Note: Not effective on Rhododendrons, Azaleas, or Laurels.
Mulch all plant pits and beds with 3" deep specified mulch.
Spread four (4) inches of pinestraw mulch in all areas designated to
receive pine tree plantings.
Spread mulch solid in planting beds.
Thickness is uniform throughout.
Plant Nutrient Solution:
a.
b.
c.
Apply nutrient solution (Asset RTU) to all trees within twenty-four (24)
hours of planting.
Mix rate: 1 pint/100 gallons of water.
Application rate: 20 gallons/each tree.
G. Solid Sod:
1.
2.
Procure and handle sod per AHD, Section 860.05(b) 1-4.
Preparation of Sod Bed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Spread and scarify amended topsoil as specified.
Rake and otherwise manipulate to form smooth-draining grades, remove
all stones and clay lumps 1" in diameter or larger.
Leave the surface of the topsoil 1-1/2" below finished grade.
Do not move heavy objects over areas to be sodded after the soil has
32930 - 12
June 16, 2016
e.
3.
H.
3.2
Solid Sod Placement:
a.
Lay sod when sod bed is not excessively wet or frozen, but when soil is
damp for a depth of 4".
b.
Immediately upon approval of bed preparation, lay sod smoothly, edge-toedge, with staggered joints.
c.
Press firmly into contact with sod bed by tamping or rolling by approved
means to eliminate all air pockets, providing a true and even surface, and
assuring knitting.
d.
Fill cracks between sod blocks with strips of living sod, topsoil, or humus.
e.
Water thoroughly by use of sprinkler or spray, without erosive force.
Site Annual Planting:
1.
I.
been prepared. Planting in compacted areas will not be permitted.
The finished surface of the areas to be sodded shall be reviewed by the
Landscape Architect prior to sod placement.
Prepare all annual beds according to the Annual Bed Preparation detail included
in the Drawings.
Aggregate Mulch: Install to thickness shown on Drawings/
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment and means for proper maintenance of all materials
and workmanship included in the Work of this Section until Substantial Completion and
the beginning of any contracted maintenance period.
B.
Maintenance until Substantial Completion is included in the Work of this Section.
3.3
A.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND WARRANTY
Substantial Completion and Payment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Submit request for inspection of Substantial Completion, with a punch list of
contract items to complete, to the Landscape Architect at least one week prior to
anticipated date of inspection.
Review the Work jointly with the Landscape Architect for Substantial Completion.
Upon completion of repairs and replacements found necessary at time of review,
the Landscape Architect will confirm the Date of Substantial Completion of the
Work.
Substantial Completion constitutes the beginning date of the One-Year Warranty
Period.
Basis of Acceptance:
1.
2.
3.
Landscape Grading will be counted as a separate lump sum item for payment.
Planted trees and shrubs will be counted as individual units, complete, in place
and planted in accordance with plans and specifications. Each unit will include
the installed plant, topsoil, topsoil mix, mulch and staking apparatus.
Solid sod will be counted in square yards provided and installed, including sod,
32930 - 13
June 16, 2016
4.
5.
C.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.4
ground preparation and topsoil, in accordance with plans and specifications.
Plant pit drainage will be counted as incidental to the Work, and will not be
counted separately for payment.
The cost of mobilization (including all provisions of General Requirements and
General and Supplementary Conditions), Clean-up, Warranty, and Maintenance
until Substantial Completion as specified herein are considered incidental to the
Work and will not be counted as separate items for payment.
Warranty all materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the
Date of Substantial Completion.
When Work is substantially completed in parts, the Warranty Period extends from
each Substantial Completion date to the terminal date of the last Warranty
Period. Thus, all Warranty Periods terminate at the same time.
During the period of the Warranty, replace with no additional compensation, and
as soon as weather permits, all dead plant materials and all materials not in a
thriving condition; replace all other workmanship and materials which are
unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Landscape Architect; make good any other
damage, loss, destruction, or failure to flourish sufficiently as the result of inferior
or defective materials or workmanship, including, but not limited to inadequate
drainage.
All replacement material shall match the size attained by original materials at the
time of the replacement.
Remove dead or dying material from the site within one week of notice from the
Landscape Architect.
Repair grades and other Work necessitated due to planting replacements.
If the replacement is not acceptable during or at the end of the Warranty Period,
the Owner may elect either subsequent replacement or credit. Replacements
shall have a similar one-year Warranty from date of replacement.
Warranty applies to losses or damage other than those due to vandalism, Owner
neglect, or Acts of Nature, as determined by the Landscape Architect. Acts of
Nature include, but may not be limited to, high winds of hurricane or tornado
force, sleet, hail, freezing rain, and extreme cold (as determined by the
Landscape Architect). The Contractor agrees to replace losses due to Acts of
Nature at fifteen percent (15%) less than original contract price for the damaged
Work.
FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
Contractor is responsible for contacting the Landscape Architect at the end of the
Warranty Period to schedule final inspection. Should the Contractor fail to contact the
Landscape Architect at this time, the Warranty Period is automatically extended until
he does so.
B.
At the end of the Warranty Period submit request for inspection for Final Acceptance to
the Landscape Architect at least one week prior to anticipated date of inspection;
include list of Work substantially accepted and list of Work replaced during Warranty
Period.
C.
Upon request for inspection, jointly review with Landscape Architect all Warrantied Work
32930 - 14
June 16, 2016
for Final Acceptance.
D.
Remove tree staking apparatus and saucers from all trees, unless otherwise
recommended; replace mulch to specified thickness.
E.
Upon completion by the Contractor of all required repairs and replacements, the
Landscape Architect will confirm the date of Final Acceptance of the Work.
32930 - 15
June 16, 2016
SECTION 321216
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
1.
2.
Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3.
Hot-mix asphalt paving.
4.
Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay.
5.
Pavement-marking paint.
6.
Asphalt Surface Treatments
B. Related Sections:
1.
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and
for aggregate pavement shoulders.
2.
Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers
at paving terminations.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.
B. DOT: Department of Transportation.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other
applicable requirements of standard specifications of state or local DOT.
1. Standard Specification: Alabama Department of Transportation (ALDOT) Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction", 2008 edition.
2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in
the standard specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested
physical and performance properties.
B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each
job mix proposed for the Work.
C. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
D. Samples: for each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches, minimum.
E. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer.
F. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.
G. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved
by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of Alabama DOT for asphalt paving work.
321216- 1
May 16, 2016
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in
standard specifications do not apply to this Section.
C. Pre-installation Conference
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or
excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate
cure, or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at
time of placement.
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of
placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces
and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials
55 deg F for water-based materials], and not exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AGGREGATES
A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
B. Fine Aggregate: [ASTM D 1073] [or] [AASHTO M 29], sharp-edged natural sand or
sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
C. Mineral Filler: [ASTM D 242] [or] [AASHTO M 17], rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement,
or other inert material.
2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a, [PG 64-22] [PG 58-28] [PG 7022] <Insert performance grade>.
B. Tack Coat: [ASTM D 977] [or] [AASHTO M 140] emulsified asphalt, or [ASTM D 2397]
[or] [AASHTO M 208] cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of
suitable grade and consistency for application.
C. SLURRY SEAL COAT – ALDOT SECTION 402 ASPHALTIC SEAL COAT (Refer to
ALDOT Standard Specifications for requirements and specifications).
2.03
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in
granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint.
1. Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated].
C. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint.
1. Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated].
D. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.
E. Wheel Stops:
Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive
strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered
corners, drainage slots on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
321216- 2
May 16, 2016
F. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled
postconsumer and postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; [4 inches high by 6
inches wide by 72 inches long] <Insert dimensions>. Provide chamfered corners,
drainage slots on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel-stop manufacturer for application to
asphalt pavement.
2.04 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction[; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design
Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types";] and complying with the
following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area
where Project is located.
2. Base Course:
ALDOT Section 825 Crushed Aggregate Base Course
3. Binder Course: ALDOT Section 424 Binder Layer
4. Tack Coat: ALDOT Section 405 Tack Coat (0.05gal/SY, minimum)
5. Wearing Course: ALDOT Section 424 Wearing Layer
B. All Asphalt and work in the ROW shall comply with the City of Birmingham "Standard
Specifications for Construction of Public Works Projects"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify
soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before
cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross
sections indicated, or as required to have a smooth transition at tie-in locations.
1.
Mill to a depth of 2 inches or as required to provide a depth of new pavement
equal to the wearing surface or top layer of the asphalt surface.
2.
Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges.
3.
Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.
4.
Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold
milling.
5.
Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep
material separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.
Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility.
6.
7.
Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.
3.03 PATCHING
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing
pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches,
extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut
321216- 3
May 16, 2016
excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material.
unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
Recompact existing
B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to
reseat concrete pieces firmly.
1.
Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or
trapezoidal patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise
indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unboundaggregate base course to form new subgrade.
C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix
asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.
1.
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2.
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of
patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
3.04
REPAIRS AND LEVELING
A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt
surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.
1.
Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.
B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a
depth of 1/4 inch.
3.05
1.
Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
2.
Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide.
Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
3.
Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide.
Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess
SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious
material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive
paving.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates
and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of
compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.
C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base
course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material
to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours
minimum.
1.
If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread
sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup
under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and
after volatiles have evaporated.
2.
Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15
gal./sq. yd.
321216- 4
May 16, 2016
1.
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2.
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.06 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off.
Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that
prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and
thickness when compacted.
1.
Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
2.
Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls
and tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of
a lesser width are required.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable
hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix
asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.07 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections.
Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other
sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
3.08
1.
2.
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
3.
Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches .
4.
Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and
resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either
"bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane"
and "Resumption of Paving Operations."
COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight
without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or
with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling
joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for
indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to
comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling
while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling
until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density:
92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density
according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96
percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt
is still warm.
321216- 5
May 16, 2016
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of
pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact
thoroughly.
F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has
cooled and hardened.
G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.
3.10 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within
the following tolerances:
1.
Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2.
Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface
smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot
straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
1.
Base Course: 1/4 inch
2.
3.
Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to
crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been
verified with Architect.
B. Allow paving to age for [30] [90] days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions
indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to
provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
1.
Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6
lb/gal.
3.12 WHEEL STOPS
A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel
dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into
pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or
measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.14 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
321216- 6
May 16, 2016
SECTION 321313
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1.
Driveways.
2.
Roadways.
3.
4.
Parking lots.
Curbs and gutters.
5.
Walks.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design
mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test
results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing
ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M
requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than ___ percent.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.
G. Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars zinc coated after
fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating]. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place.
Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from
steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete
specified.
321313 - 1
May 16, 2016
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand,
and source throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I
a.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
b.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from
a single source.
1. Maximum course aggregate size: 1" unless noted.
2. Fine aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity when exposed to alkali
in cement.
C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions
by mass of cementitious material.
F. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures; color stable,[ free of carbon black,] non-fading, and resistant to
lime and other alkalis.
1.
Color: As indicated by architect, if requested.
2.03 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Fiber: [Monofilament] [or] [fibrillated] polypropylene fibers engineered and
designed for use in concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III,
1/2 to 2 inches long (Fibers may be of graded lengths).
2.04 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, [Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry] [or] [cotton mats].
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover:
polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
Class B, dissipating.
ASTM C 309, Type 1,
F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
Class B, dissipating.
ASTM C 309, Type 2,
2.05 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.
B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, non-glazing,
abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate
containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric
oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
321313 - 2
May 16, 2016
2.06 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with AASHTO M248, Type N; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready
mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II.
1.
Color: As indicated.
C. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint.
1.
Color: As indicated.
2.07 WHEEL STOPS
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete.
1.
Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
2.
Adhesive: As recommended by wheel stop manufacturer for application to
concrete pavement.
2.08 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following
properties by Class:
1.
Class A – 4000 psi compressive strength @ 28 Days.
Maximum water to
cement ratio shall be 0.40. Slump shall be a minimum of 2” and a maximum of
4”. Air content shall be 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.
2.
Class B – 3000 psi compressive strength @ 28 Days.
Maximum water to
cement ratio shall be 0.50. Slump shall be a minimum of 2” and a maximum of
4”. Air content shall be 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.
B. Chemical Admixtures:
Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Synthetic Fiber:
Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's
recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. .
D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.09 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch
discharged and used in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Replace and
recompact as necessary to achieve a favorable proof roll test according to the testing /
geotechnical representative.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
321313 - 3
May 16, 2016
3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of
work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
3.04 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to
line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints
at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and
at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless
paving terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, where concrete
strips in different directions meet, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one fourth to one
third of the concrete thickness, and at locations to match jointing of existing adjacent
concrete paving]. Contraction joints in curbs, structures, etc. shall match up with joints
in paving where possible.
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete
with an edging tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and
consolidating concrete.
C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do
not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and
uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface.
Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or
spreading surface treatments.
3.06 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has
disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float
surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
321313 - 4
May 16, 2016
1.
Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished
concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2.
Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across floatfinished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fineline texture.
3.
Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating
float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom,
perpendicular to line of traffic.
C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate
finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate
manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
2.
After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and
water to expose nonslip aggregate.
3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing,
curing compound, or a combination of these.
3.08 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1.
2.
Elevation: 3/4 inch.
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3.
Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.
4.
Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
5.
Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
6.
Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.09 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Allow concrete and asphalt paving to cure for a minimum of 28 days and be dry before
starting permanent pavement marking. Temporary marking may be necessary.
B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
3.10 WHEEL STOPS
A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer.
321313 - 5
May 16, 2016
B. Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two steel dowels located at
one-quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond
dowels to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that
does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections
from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days
after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
321313 - 6
May 16, 2016
SECTION 32 3119
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2011.
D.
ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and
Related Coatings; 2001 (Reapproved 2006).
E.
ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of
Rapid Deformation (Impact); 1993 (Reapproved 2010).
F.
ASTM D3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test; 2005e1.
G.
ASTM F900 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates; 2011.
H.
UL 325 Safety Standards for Door, Drapery, Gates, Louvers, and Window Operators and
Systems; 2013.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 3000 – , for submittal procedures.
B.
For Review.
1. Shop Drawings.
a. Fences and gates.
C.
For Information.
1. Product data.
a. Fence panels and gates.
2. Certificates.
a. Manufacturer's letters of conformance certifying that zinc coating on fence
components conforms to specified requirements.
A.
Refer to Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling
requirements.
1.04 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to Section 01 7000 – Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLIES
A.
Following Specification covers design, materials, and installation of modular, open grille,
ornamental metal fencing panels with supporting posts and gates.
B.
Fences shall follow uniform gradient conforming to finished grades.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Fence Panel.
1. Vertical main bars (pickets): 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch spaced 3-15/16 inches on center.
a. Pickets terminate at top rail and extend beyond bottom rail minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
2. Horizontals:
a. Two top rails: 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch channels spaced 5-1/2 inches on center.
b. Single bottom rail: 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch channel.
3. Panel height: 48 inches.
32 3119 - 1
June 16, 2016
4.
5.
Panel width: 96 inches.
Factory welded fabrication.
B.
Posts.
1. Tubular steel
2. Size: 2.5 inches by 2.5 inches.
3. Thickness: 0.079 inch
4. Length: 72 inches above grade.
5. Typical spacing: 8 feet on center.
6. Top cap: Manufacturer's standard profile.
C.
Gates.
1. Hinged swing.
a. In accordance with ASTM F900.
b. Construction to match fence.
c. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
d. Operation: Manual
e. Hardware.
1) Hinges as standard with manufacturer.
2) Latch: Slide bolt to accommodate padlock.
D.
Acceptable product.
1. Montage Commercial Majestic by Ameristar Fence Products, Tulsa, Oklahoma:
www.ameristarfence.com
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel.
1. Solid members in accordance with ASTM A36.
2. Tubular members in accordance with ASTM A500, Grade B.
3. Hot-dip galvanized to not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc coating per square foot in
accordance with ASTM A123.
B.
Finish.
1. Factory applied heat-cured polyester powder coating
2. Electrostatically applied colored polyester powder coating heat cured to chemically bond
finish to metal substrate.
3. Hardness: 2H measured in accordance with ASTM D3363.
4. Direct impact resistance: 160 inch-pounds tested in accordance with ASTM D2794.
5. Salt spray resistance: No undercutting, rusting, or blistering after 500 hours in 5 percent
salt spray at 95 degrees F and 95 percent relative humidity, tested in accordance with
ASTM B117.
6. Weatherability: No film failure and 88 percent gloss retention after 1 year exposure in
South Florida with test panels tilted at 45 degrees and when tested in accordance with
ASTM D822.
7. Color: As selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer's standard line.
C.
Concrete Foundations.
1. Concrete: 3000 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Employ Land Surveyor or Civil Engineer to lay out fence lines prior to installation to ensure
accurate placement and to prevent encroachment on property owned by others.
B.
Include removal of brush and vegetation in path of fences.
32 3119 - 2
June 16, 2016
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install fencing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and reviewed Shop
Drawings.
B.
Install fence posts plumb and level by embedding post in concrete footing.
C.
Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged panels. Remove damaged components from
site and replace.
D.
Secure fence panels with standard stainless steel bolts to fence posts after posts have been
set in footings.
E.
Touch-up damaged finish with paint supplied by manufacturer and matching original coating.
F.
Gates.
1. Install gates and adjust hardware for smooth operation.
2. Test gates. Correct deficiencies and adjust.
END OF SECTION
32 3119 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 32 3119.40
DECORATIVE ORNAMENTAL PICKET CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.
Decorative ornamental aluminum picket cantilever slide gate system.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Division 03 3300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
2.
Division 31 2000 Earthwork
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing Materials:
1.
B117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
2.
D523 Test Method for Specular Gloss
3.
D714 Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints
4.
D1654 Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens
Subjected to Corrosive Environments
5.
D2244 Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences
from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
6.
D2794 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of
Rapid Deformation
7.
D3359 Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
8.
F567 Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence
9.
F1184 Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal
Slide Gates
10.
F2200 Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction
B. Underwriters Laboratory UL-325 safety standards
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufactures information for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Product elevations, sections, and details as necessary.
C.
Product Warranty: Standard limited warranty that the cantilever slide gate system
is free from defects in material and workmanship and, under normal or proper
usage for a period of seven (7) years from the date of original purchase.
A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar
with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniques specified.
B. Provide complete cantilever slide gate system with all components provided by a
single manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing of cantilever
slide gate systems with a minimum of 5 years documented experience.
32 3119.40 - 1
June 16, 2016
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A.
Cantilever slide gate to be delivered to the project site pre-assembled when possible
and coated. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure
that no damages occurred during shipping.
B.
Materials shall be handled and stored properly to protect against damage, weather,
vandalism and theft.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DECORATIVE ORNAMENTAL ALUMINUM CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE
Approved manufacture: Merchants Metals
Substitutions per 01 6000
A.
Cantilever Slide Gates: SECURE-TRAC® manufactured in accordance with
ASTM F 1184 Type II Class 2, and in compliance with UL-325, and ASTM 2200 (No
substitution). Gate to be made of Aluminum Alloy 6005-T61. All square members are
2” sq. weighing 0.94 lb. /ft. (139 kg/m). Complete frame welded to one piece track
and 4” x 2” bottom rail weighing 1.71 lbs. /ft. (2.54 kg/m). Supply 2 truck assemblies
that are swivel type having lubricated and sealed ball bearing wheels.
B.
Gates 31’0” (9449 mm) thru 40’0” (12192 mm) dual top tracks member weighing
6.36 lb./ft. (9.45kg/m). The bottom rail 4” x 2” weighing 1.71 lb. /ft. (2.54 kg/m). Top
tracks require two additional truck assemblies. Diagonal adjustable 1/4” (6 mm)
stainless steel truss cables (2) provided inside each panel of the gate.
C.
Aluminum 1” sq. Picket style – choose one: Lafayette, Kent, Monroe, or Curve
Top.
D.
Aluminum 1.5” sq. Rail - choose one: Two, Three, Three or Four Rails with rings,
Four Rails, or Custom.
E.
Chain Link 9 gauge wire 2” fabric options choose one: Galvanized before
Weaving (GBW), Galvanized after Weaving (GAW), Aluminized, or Thermally Fused
& Adhered 2b PVC.
F.
Finish – Polymer coated horizontal slide gates and posts shall match the coating
type and color as that specified for the fence framework. Finish shall comply with
Corrosion Resistance Salt Spray Test per ASTM B117, Impact Resistance per ASTM
D2794, and Adhesion per ASTM D3359 Method B. All primary components shall
receive a thorough cleaning and pre-treatment with a 10-step process: Hot alkaline
cleaner, clear water rinse, hot iron phosphate application, clear water rinse, reverse
Osmosis rinse, dry off oven heat, zinc enriched powder primer coat at 2-4 mils., gel
oven heat, Ultra polyester finish T.G.I.C. powder coat at 2-4 mils., and final curing
oven. Choose color: Black, Brown, Green, or Custom.
G.
Gateposts, 4” O.D. (101.6 mm) schedule 40 weighing 9.11 lb. /ft. (13.6 kg/m).
Single gates with single tracks require 3 gate posts. (1 latch post and 2 support
posts) Single gates with dual tracks require 5 gate posts. (1 latch and 2 dual support
posts) Double gates require twice the number of support posts but do not have a
latch post.
H.
Electrically operated horizontal slide gates must be manufactured and installed to
comply with the safety requirements of ASTM F2200 and UL 325.
2.2 GATES
A.
Ornamental fence and gates (see section 32 31 19)
32 3119.40 - 2
June 16, 2016
2.3 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations.
B. Property lines and legal boundaries of work to be clearly established by the general
contractor or property owner.
3.3 FRAMEWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Posts: Posts shall be set plumb in concrete footings. Minimum footing diameter
four times the largest cross section of the post up to a 4.00” (101.6 mm) dimension
and three times the largest cross section of post greater than a 4.00” (101.6 mm)
dimension. 16" diam. x 5'-0". Local codes, site soil conditions, local frost depth, fence
height and wind load may require larger diameter or deeper footings - See Chain Link
Manufactures Institute – Product Guide and Wind Load Guide CLFMI: WLG 2445>
Top of concrete footing to be at grade crowned to shed water away from the post
B.
CANTILEVER GATE INSTALLATION
A.
Horizontal Slide Gates: Install according to manufacturer’s instructions and in
accordance with ASTM F567. Gates shall be plum in the closed position, installed to
slide with an initial pull force no greater than 40 lbs. (18.14 kg). Ground clearance
shall be 3 in. (76 mm), grade permitting. Electrically operated gate installation must
conform to ASTM F2200 and UL 325.
3.4 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
A.
Grounding: A licensed electrical contractor shall install grounding when required.
3.3 CLEANING
A.
Clean up gates debris from the site.
END OF SECTION
32 3119.40 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 32 3913
BOLLARDS
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Metal bollards.
2.
Solar-powered lighting bollards.
3.
Mounting hardware.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Division 03 3000 Sections: Concrete
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B.
ASTM A312 – Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
C.
ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
D.
ASTM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
E.
ASTM B26 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings.
F.
CE Mark – Manufacturer’s declaration of compliance with European Union Low Voltage
Directive 2006/95/EC.
G.
RoHS – Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures
B.
Product Data: Provide for each type of bollard, component, finish, and accessory specified.
C.
Color Samples: [Submit manufacturer’s standard colors for selection.]
D.
Setting Drawings: Show embedded items and cutouts required for work specified in other
Sections.
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s field touch-up, cleaning, and maintenance
instructions.
32 3913 - 1
June 16, 2016
F.
1.4
Warranty Documentation: Submit sample of manufacturer’s warranty.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with Section 01 6000 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B.
Protect bollards and accessories during delivery, storage, and handling.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Comply with Section 01 7000 – Warranties.
B.
Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of invoice, except as otherwise indicated.
a. Coatings: Two years, against peeling, cracking, or significant color change.
b. Solar-Powered Lighting System: Three years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Reliance Foundry Co. website www.reliance-foundry.com,
B.
Substitutions: Per Section 01 3300 for substitution procedures. Not allowed.
2.2
A.
METAL BOLLARDS
Bollard [Designer’s Designation]:
1.
Model: Reliance Foundry; R-7901.
2.
Size: 36 inches high x 4 1/3 inches diameter.
3.
Design: Cylindrical with segmented rings and rounded top.
4.
Material:
a.
Steel: ASTM A36; 25 percent recycled-material content.
5.
Country of Origin: China.
6.
Color Coating:
a.
Type: Polyester powder coat over epoxy primer.
b.
Color: [Black textured semi gloss.] [Dark green.] [Statuary bronze.] [Bengal
silver.] [Anodized silver.] [Safety yellow.]
7.
Reflective Stripe: [White][Yellow][Blue][None].
8.
Installation:
a.
Fixed, New Concrete, Embedded.
b.
Fixed, Existing Concrete, Flange, surface mount.
c.
Security post cover, new post:
1)
Security Post: [Steel] [Galvanized steel] pipe, size as shown on
Drawings.
2)
Footing and Fill: Concrete, 3000 psi minimum.
3)
Cover Attachment: [Set screws] [Adhesive anchor] [Foam adhesive].
d.
Removable, New Concrete, Receiver:
1)
Stainless steel receiver with lid.
e.
Removable, Existing Concrete, Receiver:
32 3913 - 2
June 16, 2016
1)
2.3
Stainless steel receiver with lid.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Security Post: Galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A500, Grade B.
1.
Manufacturer: Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd.
2.
Country of Origin: United States.
3.
Installation: Direct embed.
B.
Chain:
1.
Chain: 5/16-inch galvanized steel chain, Grade 30, with quick-release type
connections. Provide sufficient lengths to provide drape
2.
Chain Eye: 5/16-inch diameter steel.
3.
Quick Links: Powder coated chain links with barrel nut closures.
4.
Finish: Powder coated to match bollard finish.
C.
Padlock: [Brass][Marine Grade], supplied by bollard manufacturer. Key alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine paving or other substrates for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements for
placement and location of embedded items, condition of substrate, and other conditions
affecting installation of bollards.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and setting drawings.
B.
Damaged, cracked, chipped, deformed or marred bollards are not acceptable. Field touchup minor imperfections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3
CLEANING & PROTECTION
A.
Protect bollards against damage.
B.
Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, clean bollards in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions to remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other foreign materials.
C.
Touch up damaged finishes according to manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4
A.
CLOSEOUT
Provide executed warranty.
END OF SECTION
32 3913 - 3
June 16, 2016
SECTION 331116
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related work specified elsewhere includes:
Section 312000 - "Earthwork"
Section 033000 - "Concrete"
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water service piping and appurtenances from the source of
potable water to a point 5 feet outside the building.
B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters provided
by the utility company to the site, ready for installation. All fees and charges for water
service, meters, taps, permits, etc., shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for valves, water meter, and identification devices.
2.
Shop drawings for precast concrete valve pits and meter pit, including frames
and covers.
3.
Shop drawings for cast-in-place concrete valve pits and meter pit, including
frames and covers.
Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes, and valves and meter locations and
elevations. Include details of underground structures, connections, anchors, and
reaction backing. Show other piping in the same trench and clearances from
water service piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping
and proximate structures.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Coordination profile drawings showing water service piping in elevation. Draw
profiles at a horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and a vertical
scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe, valves, structures,
meter, anchors, and reaction backing. Show types, sizes, materials, and
elevations of other utilities crossing water service piping.
Record drawings at project closeout of installed water service piping and
products in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
Maintenance data for valves and water meter, for inclusion in Operating and
Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water to the project.
B. Comply with requirements of the City of Montgomery and other authorities having
jurisdiction, when more stringent than specified or otherwise indicated.
331116 - 1
May 16, 2016
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2.
Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends.
3.
Set valves in best position for handling.
rattling.
Set gate valves closed to prevent
B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves during storage:
1.
Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for
storage.
2.
Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature
higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary,
support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.
C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems
as lifting or rigging points.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify
existing utility locations. Verify that water service piping may be installed in
compliance with the original design and referenced standards.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Coordinate connection to public water main with utility company.
B. Coordinate with interior water distribution piping.
C. Coordinate with other utility work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following, subject to acceptance by and regulations of the local public water utility
company:
1. Gate Valves:
2.
..
American Darling Valve; Div. of American Cast Iron Pipe Co.
..
..
Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc.
Hammond Valve Corp.
..
Jenkins Bros.
..
Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc.
..
Milwaukee Valve Co.
..
Mueller-Hersey; A Grinnell Co.
..
Nibco, Inc.
..
Stockham Valve & Fittings, Inc.
..
U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co.
..
Waterous Co.
Bronze Corporation Stops and Valves:
..
Ford Meter Box Co., Inc.
..
Hays Div.; Romac Industries.
331116 - 2
May 16, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
..
McDonald, A.Y., Mfg. Co.
..
Drilling Machine Corporation Stops:
..
Ford Meter Box Co., Inc.
..
..
Tapping Valves:
..
Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc.
..
Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc.
..
..
U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co.
Water Meters:
..
..
Badger Meter, Inc.
..
Kent Meters, Inc.
..
..
Rockwell Intl.; Measurement & Flow Control Div.
..
Schlumberger Industries; Neptune Water Div.
Drains:
..
..
Ancon, Inc.
Josam Co.
..
Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
..
Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
..
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
Underground Warning Tapes:
..
Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc.
..
Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
..
..
Calpico, Inc.
Carlton Industries, Inc.
..
EMED Co., Inc.
..
Seton Name Plate Co.
2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS, GENERAL:
A. Pipe and pipe fitting materials shall be compatible with each other. Where more than
one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 350.
1.
Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar, sealcoated.
2.
Gaskets: AWWA C111.
3.
Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250psi pressure rating; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350-psi
pressure rating.
a.
Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar.
331116 - 3
May 16, 2016
b.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
c.
Encasement: AWWA C105, polyethylene film tube.
C. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe 4 Inches and Larger: AWWA C900; Class 150; with
bell end and elastomeric gasket, with plain end for cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings, or
with plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings.
1.
2.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
PVC Couplings and Fittings: AWWA C900, with ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal
gaskets.
3.
Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250psi pressure rating; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350-psi
pressure rating; of dimension to match pipe outside diameter.
a. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar.
b.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
D. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe 6 Inches and Smaller: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
1.
PVC Fittings: Elastomeric gasketed joint, unless otherwise acceptable to local
public water utility company.
a. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
b.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
*water service pipe for the Calhoun County Board of Education shall be PVC
Schedule 40 with glued joints unless otherwise shown on the Plans. All pipe
shall have underground marking tape and wire that will enable underground
locating of the water pipe in the future.
2.03 VALVES:
A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves 3 Inches and Larger: AWWA C500, cast- iron double
disc, bronze disc and seat rings, or AWWA C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, castiron or ductile-iron body and bonnet, stem nut, 200-psi working pressure, mechanical
joint ends.
B. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; body and screw
bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge,
nonrising copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon-impregnated packing,
and malleable iron handwheel.
C. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "WATER,"
bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in
diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of
valve.
1. Provide a steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall
have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and
socket fitting valve operating nut.
D. Curb Stops: Bronze body, ground key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and
outlet to match service piping material.
E. Service Boxes for Curb Stops: Cast-iron box having telescoping top section of length
required for depth of bury of valve and cover having lettering "WATER," and bottom
section with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel approximately 3 inches in
diameter.
331116 - 4
May 16, 2016
1.
Provide steel tee-handle shut-off rod with each service box. Shut-off rod shall
have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and
slotted end fitting curb stop head.
F. New Connections Larger than 2-Inches:
1.
Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Provide a complete assembly, including
tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and bolts and nuts. The sleeve and the valve shall
be compatible with the tapping machine to be used.
a.
Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron or ductile-iron 2-piece bolted sleeve with
flanged outlet for new branch connection. Sleeve may have mechanical
joint ends with rubber gaskets or have sealing rings in the sleeve body.
Sleeve shall mate with the size and type pipe material being tapped.
Outlet flange shall be size required for branch connection.
G. New Connections 2-Inches and Smaller:
1.
Service Clamps and Corporation Stops: Provide a complete assembly, including
service clamp, corporation stop, and bolts and nuts. The clamp and stop shall be
compatible with the drilling machine to be used.
a.
Service Clamp: Cast iron or ductile iron with gasket and AWWA C800
threaded outlet for corporation stop, and threaded end straps.
b. Corporation Stops: Bronze body and ground key plug, with AWWA C800
threaded inlet and outlet to match service piping material.
2.04 ANCHORAGES:
A. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel.
B. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel.
C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron.
D. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel.
E. Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
F. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi.
1.
2.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4.
Water: Potable.
5.
Refer to Section 03310 - "Concrete" for additional information and requirements.
2.05 VALVE PITS AND METER PIT- (if any):
A. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi.
1.
2.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
3.
4.
Water: Potable.
5.
B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following:
1.
Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain.
2.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
331116 - 5
May 16, 2016
3.
C. Ladder - (if required): ASTM A 36, steel, or may be polyethylene-encased cast-iron or
steel steps.
1. Provide for pits with bottoms 3'-0" or more below grade.
2.06 WATER METER:
A. Water meter will be furnished by the utility company.
1.
Cost of meter and any installation charges shall be paid by the Contractor.
B. Meter Box: Cast-iron body, cast-iron cover having lettering "WATER METER," and
base section, of length to fit o ver service piping. The base section shall be open at
the bottom, slotted, and may be cast iron, PVC, or a piece of clay or other pipe.
2.07 WATER BACKFLOW PREVENTER:
A. As specified by the Birmingham Water Works Board in an above ground, heated vault
box as specified by the Birmingham Water Works Board. All above ground boxes
shall be insulated and provided with a strip heater capable of maintain temperatures in
vault above freezing. Underground power shall be provide to vault. This power shall
be a dedicated run in a conduit to an approved panel per the Electrical Engineer, and
per Electrical Code.
2.08 IDENTIFICATION:
A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4
mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters
"CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW."
B. Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved plastic laminate label, for installation on the main
electrical meter panel; not less than 1 inch by 3 inches, with caption "CAUTION - THIS
STRUCTURE HAS A NONMETALLIC WATER SERVICE."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
All work to the water system shall be in compliance with the Birmingham Water Works
Board standards and regulations.
3.02 PREPARATION OF BURIED PIPE FOUNDATION:
A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation
throughout the length of the piping.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are
to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped sand
backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure
continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
D. Refer to Section 02200 - "Earthwork" for additional requirements.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Ductile-Iron Pipe:
Install with cement-mortar-lined, ductile-iron or cast-iron,
mechanical joint or push-on joint fittings and rubber gaskets in accordance with
AWWA C600.
1.
Polyethylene Encasement: Install in accordance with AWWA C105.
B. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe (4-inches and larger): Install with cement-mortar-lined,
ductile-iron or cast-iron, mechanical joint or push-on joint fittings and rubber gaskets in
accordance with AWWA M23.
331116 - 6
May 16, 2016
C. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe (3-inches and smaller): Install with PVC, Schedule 40
socket-type, solvent cement or elastomeric gasketed fittings in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 12 inches below average local
frost depth or 36 inches below finished grade, whichever is greater.
E. Water Main Connection By Utility Company: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of
size and in location as indicated, from water utility.
F. Water Main Connection By Contractor (if allowed and so opted): Tap water main with
size and in location as indicated, in accordance with requirements of water utility.
1.
Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions
2.
Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3.
Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with AWWA C600. Install valve
with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box.
4.
Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.
Remove tapping machine and connect water service piping.
5.
Where indicated or required install curb stop in service piping with head pointing
up and with cast-iron service box.
G. Water Service Termination: Terminate water service piping 5'-0" from building
foundation in location and invert as indicated. Provide temporary pipe plug for piping
extension into building.
H. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by
tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both, as indicated or required.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
A. General Application: Use mechanical joint end valves for 3-inch and larger buried
installation. Use threaded and flanged end valves for installation in pits and inside
building. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible to piping, for
2-inch and smaller installation.
B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem
pointing up and with cast-iron valve box.
C. Bronze Corporation Stops and Curb Stops: Comply with manufacturer's installation
instructions. Install buried curb stops with head pointed up and with cast-iron curb
box.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGES:
A. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves,
and hydrant branches.
3.06 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS:
A. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces
of installed ferrous anchorage devices.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF VALVE PITS AND WATER METER PIT:
A. Construct of poured-in-place or precast concrete of dimensions indicated, or if not
indicated, as required by project conditions and acceptable to utility company, with
manhole frame and cover, ladder, and drain. Provide sleeves with waterproof sleeve
seals for pipe entry and exit.
331116 - 7
May 16, 2016
B. Water Meter: Install water meter in accordance with AWWA M6, in meter pit, in
location and with support as indicated. Provide 3-valve bypass around meter, full size
of water service piping.
1. Comply with requirements of utility company and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.07A INSTALLATION OF ABOVE GROUND VAULTS/BOXES:
A. Construct per Manufacturers Specifications
3.08 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION:
A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly
over piping.
B. Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks
have sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test
pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours, or
as otherwise required by utility company, Code, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Increase pressure in 50-psi increments and inspect each joint between
increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psi. Slowly
increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable
leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new
materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits.
3.10 CLEANING:
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows, or as required by utility
company, Code, and authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that
have been altered, extended, or repaired, prior to use.
2.
Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having
jurisdiction or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, use the
procedure described in AWWA C651, or as described below:
a.
Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at
least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part
thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b.
Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine
and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c.
Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction.
Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority
shows evidence of contamination.
d.
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.
3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE:
A.
Nonrising Stem Gate Valves - 4 Inches and Larger:
AWWA - MECH JT
MANUFACTURER
C500
C509
331116 - 8
May 16, 2016
B.
American Darling
55
85
Clow Valve
F-5065
F-6100
Kennedy Valve
571X
1571X
Mueller-Hersey
A-2380-20
A-2370-20
Stockham Valve
G-743-O
G-701-O
U.S. Pipe
3460
5460
Waterous
300 Series
500 Series
Nonrising Stem Gate Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller:
MANUFACTURER
MSS SP-80 THREADED
Hammond Valve Corp.
C.
IB645
Jenkins Bros.
370
Milwaukee Valve Co.
Nibco
1105M
T-113 w/iron HW
Stockham Valve
B-103
Tapping Valves:
MANUFACTURER
American Darling
565 or 865
Clow Valve
F-5093
Kennedy Valve
Mueller-Hersey
950X
H-667
U.S. Pipe
D.
3860
Corporation Stops and Curb Stops:
MANUFACTURER
Ford Meter Box
CORP. STOPS
F Series
CURB STOPS
B Series
Hays
5000 Series
4000 Series
McDonald, A.Y.
3100, 4700 Series
6100 Series
Mueller-Hersey
H Series
H Series
331116 - 9
May 16, 2016
SECTION 334100
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1.
Pipe and fittings.
2.
3.
Non-pressure couplings
Cleanouts.
4.
Manholes
5.
Concrete
6.
7.
Stormwater inlets.
Pipe outlets.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.
2.
Catch basins and stormwater inlets . Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
frames, covers, and grates.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other
piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate
interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
B. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale
of n ot less than 1 inch equals 50 feet (1:500) and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch
equals 5 feet (1:50). Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and
elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.
C. Product Certificates:
manufacturer.
For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert
number> days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of service without [Architect's] [Construction
Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.
334100 - 1
May 16, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
*All Storm Pipe for this project shall be Class III RCP unless approved by Engineer.
2.01 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 3 to NPS 10:
Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
AASHTO M 252M,
1.
Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2
gasket material that mates with tube and fittings.
2.
Joints made using couplings in subparagraph below are soiltight.
3.
Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.
B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60 (DN 300 to DN 1500):
AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
1.
Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2
gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings.
2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.
2.02 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Corrugated Sewer Piping:
1.
2.
Pipe: ASTM F 949, PVC, corrugated pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed
joints.
Fittings: ASTM F 949, PVC molded or fabricated, socket type.
3.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals
B. PVC Smooth Sewer Piping:
1.
Pipe SCHEDULE 40 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.
PVC Fittings: Elastomeric gasketed joint, unless otherwise acceptable to local
public water utility company.
a. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
b. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2.03 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Reinforced-Concrete sewer Pipes (RCP), Culverts, and Fittings shall be in
accordance with ASTM C 76. Reinforced concrete pipe shall be B or C Wall, Class
III, or as shown on plans. Joints shall be tongue (spigot) and groove (bell) which are
sealed with mortar or preformed flexible sealant per ASTM C990 and AASHTO M198,
or other approved suitable sealant. Except for special pieces, pipe shall not be less
than 8 feet in length. Elliptical reinforcing is not allowed. Pipe shall be in accordance
with ASTM C 1479 and ASCE 15. Optional Seal for bell and spigot shall be rubber
gasket in accordance with ASTM C443.
2.04 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS
A. Reinforced Concrete: Min. Size 10" each side of joint, 8" thick surrounding pipe both
pipes to be joined. Interior of PIpe to be checked to be clear of any encumbrances.
B. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling,
for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to
be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.
334100 - 2
May 16, 2016
C. Sleeve Materials:
1.
For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
2.
For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
3.
For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
4.
For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
D. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:
1.
Description: Elastomeric sleeve with[ stainless-steel shear ring and] corrosionresistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
E. Shielded, Flexible Couplings:
1. Description: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,
corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
F. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings:
1.
Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of
larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
2.05 CLEANOUTS
A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device
and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with
inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure
plug.
2.
3.
Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy Duty in paved areas, Light Duty in
Landscaped Areas, Medium Duty in Sidewalks.
Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron
soil pipe and fittings.
B. Plastic Cleanouts:
1.
Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting
and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.
2.06 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:
1.
Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with
provision for sealant joints.
2.
Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base
section as required to prevent flotation.
4.
Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm)
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or
base section with integral floor.
5.
Riser Sections:
indicated.
6.
Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth
334100 - 3
May 16, 2016
7.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.
8.
Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into
manhole walls, for each pipe connection.
9.
Steps: [Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder] [Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder;
or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in
ASTM D 4101, PP] [ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing
rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both
feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or
anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth
from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches .
10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness
and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to
adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include
sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match
diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole
frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers:
1.
Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width
flange and 26-inch diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering
cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."
2.
Material: [ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile] [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35
gray] iron unless otherwise indicated.
2.07 CONCRETE
A. General:
Cast-in-place concrete
(ACI 350M/350RM), and the following:
according
1.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2.
3.
4.
Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix:
water/cementitious materials ratio.
4000
to
ACI 318,
psi minimum,
with
ACI 350/350R
0.45 maximum
1.
Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed steel.
C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland
cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious
materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.
1.
Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with
height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels
with smooth, uniform radius and slope.
a.
2.
Invert Slope: 0.50 percent, Minimum through manhole.
Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a.
Slope: 4-8 percent.
334100 - 4
May 16, 2016
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with
0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
1.
Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
2.08 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Area Inlets:
1.
2.
3.
Open Throat Inlets: Standard precast or cast in place box (concrete 4000psi),
with concrete lid on concrete piers creating an opening at least 36” in length and
exactly 6” high on all four sides (unless noted on plans). Concrete Lid to be
precast 6” thick with an HS-20 load rating. Ring and cover required for access
and maintenance (24" min. diameter opening).
Large Grate Inlets (larger than 16" in any direction): Standard precast or cast in
place box (concrete 4000psi), with concrete top on which on the frame and grate
is embedded. Concrete Top to be precast 6” thick with an HS-20 load rating.
Frame and Grate must have at least a 200 square inch open area and must have
a HS-20 load rating. Frame and grate must be as shown on the plans (24" by
24" minimum) and must be approved via submittal(s).
Small Grate Inlets (less than 16" in any direction):
a. ADS Nyoplast Drain Basin System or Approved Equal
-Standard H-20 Load Rated Rectangular Grate
-ADA compliant grate where required
-Ductile Iron Grate
b. ADS Nyoplast In-Line Inlets System or Approved Equal
-Round or Rectangular Grate
-Ductile Iron Grate
B. Wing Inlets: ALDOT "Type S" Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Inlet, Type 3 and
Type 4: Refer to ALDOT Special Drawing Number I-621-S
C. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty in Traffic Areas, according to utility standards.
2.09 PIPE OUTLETS
A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides or
concrete slope paved headwalls, according to the plans.
B. Flared End Sections: Conforming to Reinforced Concrete Pipe Specs
C. Riprap Basins: Class 2 Riprap, 2' Thick over Filter Fabric
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general
location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and
arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping
as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow
piping manufacturer's written instructions.
334100 - 5
May 16, 2016
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install
gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions
for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for
branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or
materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of
flow is prohibited.
E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use
pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.
F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1.
Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.
2.
Install piping [NPS 6 (DN 150)] <Insert value> and larger with restrained joints at
tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or
fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete
supports or anchors.
Install piping with [36-inch (915-mm)] [48-inch (1220-mm)] [60-inch (1520-mm)]
[72-inch (1830-mm)] <Insert dimension> minimum cover.
Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook."
Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook."
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or
AWWA M41.
7.
8.
Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
9.
Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and
ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
10. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's
"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
G. Install corrosion-protection piping encasement over the following underground metal
piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105:
1.
Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
2.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3.
Ductile-iron pipe and fittings.
4.
Expansion joints.
3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1.
2.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to
CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's
"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
334100 - 6
May 16, 2016
3.
Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
4.
Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints.
5.
Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or
AWWA M41.
6.
7.
Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints.
Join PVC corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomericseal joints.
8.
Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14
(ASTM C 14M) and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubbergasketed joints.
9. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe
Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.
10. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.
3.04 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use
cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil
pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of
flow in sewer pipe.
1.
2.
Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in areas unless noted.
Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic,
sidewalk areas unless noted.
3.
Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic / service
areas.
4.
Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads and public
streets unless controlling municipality dictates otherwise.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18” by 18” by
8” thick. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with
pavement surface.
3.05 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in
pavements.
3.06 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
B. All Sumps created or inherent in the manufacturer’s design of the catch basin, inlet, or
junction box shall be filled in with 3000psi concrete to the make a smooth flow
line (invert) across the structure. This concrete invert shall extend up at least 6
334100 - 7
May 16, 2016
inches and be shaped to the same diameter of the connecting pipes (with curves
as necessary) to make a smooth transition across the structure if possible.
3.07 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where
indicated.
E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.
F. All Sumps created or inherent in the manufacturer’s design of the inlet or junction box
shall be filled in with 3000psi concrete to the make a smooth flow line (invert)
across the structure. This concrete invert shall extend up at least 6 inches and
be shaped to the same diameter of the connecting pipes (with curves as
necessary) to make a smooth transition across the structure.
3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.
3.09 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains
specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."
B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1.
Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections.
Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and
encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of
concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2.
Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20
(DN 100 to DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into
existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete
with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
3.
Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or
larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit
and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed
around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or
structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless
otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase
entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to
provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.
4.
a.
Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing
concrete and piping materials.
Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris
from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous
material that may accumulate.
334100 - 8
May 16, 2016
C. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste
Interceptors."if applicable.
D. Pipe couplings and expansion joints with pressure ratings at least equal to piping
rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow,
nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.
a.
[Unshielded] [Shielded] flexible couplings for same or minor difference
OD pipes.
b.
Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with
different OD.
Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular
space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits
installation.
c.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge
of underground structures.
1. Use[ warning tape or] detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of
underground structures.
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at
completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
a.
b.
3.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between
structures.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c.
Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d.
Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e.
Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until
defects are within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2.
Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24
hours' advance notice.
3.
334100 - 9
May 16, 2016
4.
Submit separate report for each test.
5.
Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping:
Test according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a.
Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
b.
c.
Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.
Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
334100 - 10
May 16, 2016
Appendix
133 West Park Drive
Birmingham, Alabama 35211
1.205.940.7180
1.800.743.7191
1.205.940.7190 - fax
www.fravert.com
Original Date
3/11/111
ILLUMINATED “P” PARKING SIGN (QTY 2)
SPECIFICATIONS
18”
A: .25" ACRYLIC PANEL PAINTED P10 - TRANSLUSCENT - 2nd SURFACE APPLICATION
B: 2nd SURFACE PAINTED GRAPHICS - TRANSLUSCENT - P4
C: 18” DEEP INTERNALLY-ILLUMINATED EXTRUDED CABINET WITH ACCESS SCREWS ON ALL SIDE - P4
D: FABRICATED ALUMINUM BASE - P4
E: 1/2” THICK PLATE MOUNTED WITH MIN 4 BOLTS/EXPANSION ANCHORS TO CONCRETE FOOTING
F: CONCRETE FOOTER FLUSH WITH GRADE. FABRICATOR TO PROVIDE DETAILED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION.
G: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO RUN CONDUIT TO SITE.
COORDINATE CONCRETE FOOTER WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.
1 PLAN VIEW
SCALE: 1" = 25"
Client
BJCC
INSTALLATION:
SITE VERIFY ALL LOCATIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
Project Manager
Alison Barber
54”
2”
50” VISUAL OPENING
2”
18”
2”
Drawing
----
PARKING
PARKING
A
A
5
Client
Date
Landlord
Date
C
File
parkinglot/bjcc/alison
VERTICALLY MOUNTED
FLUORESCENT LIGHTING
AS REQUIRED
2”
69”
B
65” VISUAL OPENING
Approvals
C
13 1/2”
2 1/4”
13 1/2”
2 1/4”
D
E
5 RECOMMENDED SECTION
GRADE
SCALE: 1" = 25"
G
F
Revision Dates
---
G
36”
2 FRONT VIEW
3 SIDE VIEW
36”
SCALE: 1" = 25"
SCALE: 1" = 25"
12”
4 OPPOSITE VIEW
SCALE: 1" = 25"
PARKING LOT SIGNS
12”
©Copyright 2011, Fravert Services, Inc.
Thank you for allowing Fravert Services, Inc.
the opportunity to present designs for your
signage project.
All ideas, designs, arrangements and plans
indicated or represented on this drawing are
the property of Fravert Services, Inc. and
were created, evolved and developed for use
on and in connection with the specified
project.
Distribution or exhibition of these plans to
anyone other than employees of your
company or use of these plans to construct a
sign similar to the one embodied herin, is
expressly forbidden.
FLAT RATE SIGN (QTY 2)
SPECIFICATIONS
A: .125" THICK ALUMINUM PANEL - P2
6 PLAN VIEW
133 West Park Drive
Birmingham, Alabama 35211
1.205.940.7180
1.800.743.7191
1.205.940.7190 - fax
www.fravert.com
Original Date
3/11/111
B: VINYL BORDER AND COPY - V1
SCALE: 1" = 16"
C: 3" SQUARE ALUMINUM POST - P1 & P6
D: DIRECT BURIAL AS NECESSARY
INSTALLATION:
SITE VERIFY ALL LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
Client
BJCC
24"
Project Manager
Alison Barber
4"
Drawing
---Approvals
PARK ONLY IN
DESIGNATED SPACES
NO LARGE TRUCKS, U-HAULS
A
SPECIAL EVENTS
PARKING
B
42"
$8.00
84"
FABRICATOR RESPONSIBLE
FOR DEVELOPING MESSAGES
WELD .125" PANEL TO POST
Client
Date
Landlord
Date
File
parkinglot/bjcc/alison
CARS PARKED AT OWNER'S RISK
PLEASE LOCK YOUR DOORS
C
32"
Revision Dates
12.20.11
24"
PARKING LOT SIGNS
©Copyright 2011, Fravert Services, Inc.
D
7 FRONT VIEW
SCALE: 1" = 16"
Thank you for allowing Fravert Services, Inc.
the opportunity to present designs for your
signage project.
8 SIDE VIEW
SCALE: 1" = 16"
9 REAR VIEW
SCALE:1" = 16"
All ideas, designs, arrangements and plans
indicated or represented on this drawing are
the property of Fravert Services, Inc. and
were created, evolved and developed for use
on and in connection with the specified
project.
Distribution or exhibition of these plans to
anyone other than employees of your
company or use of these plans to construct a
sign similar to the one embodied herin, is
expressly forbidden.

bjcc premier parking lot p13 enhancements

Transcription

Similar documents

Qualification Form - Integrity Construction Service

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago

I`m helping to end MS by participating in the 2016 Jayman BUILT MS

AAA Kempinski Hotel, Vilnius

R-3324 Long Beach Road Extension

Mark Rycraft

The Board of Directors of Qatar Fuel (WOQOD) is pleased to invite

How to Open an Account with Great Lakes Credit Union (GLCU)

Untitled

5 `S` Training Program at ABV-IIITM, Gwalior on 21.07.2016